Routing Guide - QAD Document Library

Transcription

Routing Guide - QAD Document Library
Administration Guide
Transportation Management
System
70-3271-S36
PRECISION Web UI 2014
March 2014
© 2014 Precision Software, a division of QAD Inc.
Precision Software products are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by Precision Software, a
division of QAD Inc.
This document is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. No part of this document may be
reproduced, transmitted, adapted, translated or electronically stored without the prior written
consent of Precision Software, a division of QAD Inc.
PRECISION™ is a trademark of Precision Software, a division of QAD Inc.
Progress © is a registered trademark of Progress Software Corporation.
TMS_AG_vS36.pdf/ofs/hkr
Contents
Chapter 1
TMS Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Carrier Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Integrated Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Non-integrated Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Implementing TMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Master Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Carrier Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Charge Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Routing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Shipment Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Shipment Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chapter 2
Packing Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Internal ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Packing Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Internal ID Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Client Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
How to Choose the Packing Location for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Typical Configuration Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Chapter 3
Charges Master Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Charge/Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Charge Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Charge Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Charge Summary Group for Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Allocation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Chapter 4
Carriers: Precision Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
iv
Administration Guide — Base Web UI
Carrier Availability and Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Carrier Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Carrier Service Additional Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Cost Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Duty/Tax Payment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Routing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rates and Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Carrier Labels Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Carrier Tracking Number Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Calberson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Canada Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Canpar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chrono Expres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Chronopost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Ciblex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
City Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dachser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DB Schenker (US Domestic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DB Schenker (International) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DHL (Express) – US Origin – SAS Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
DHL (Express) - Legacy Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DHL Time Definite and DHL Day Definite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
DHL Global Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
DHL XML PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
DPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
DPD UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Endicia (USPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
FedEx (Express and Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Geodis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
GLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Jetpak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Kiala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Mory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Movianto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
No Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Parcelforce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Purolator - Legacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Swedish Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TNT France Domestic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
TNT (Express label and Unicom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
UPS – Tracking Number Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Trans-o-flex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Contents
UPS SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Yodel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Wim Bosman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 5
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating Rate Structures Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating a Charge Table (TH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Loading Rating Structures from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Uploading Tier-Based Excel Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Uploading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Flat Structure File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Configuring a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Chapter 6
TL/LTL New Rating Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Creating Rates and Services Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rate Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Records Created on Service Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Uploading Carrier Rate Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Formatting Rates Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Loading Rates Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Formatting Transit Time Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Uploading Transit Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Chapter 7
SMC Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configuring Connectivity System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Setting up the Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
RM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Configuring Accessorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Importing SMC Services and Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Changing Files to LTL/TL Rates File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Loading Files in LTL/TL Rates File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Error Code System Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Debug Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sample Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter 8
Discounts and Uplifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rating Discounts and Uplifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
v
vi
Administration Guide — Base Web UI
Creating System Values for Freight Discounts and Uplifts . . . . . . . . . 116
Precedence for Freight Discount and Uplifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Freight Discounts or Uplifts and Cost Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Freight Discount or Uplifts - Ensuring Customer is not Discounted too Far 124
Freight Discount or Uplifts and Fuel Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Chapter 9
TL/LTL Labeling and Tracking Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . .125
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Carrier Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Carrier Configuration Permutations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Labeling Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Switching On Label Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Configuring the Number of Labels to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Determining the Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Service Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tracking Number Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Generating Tracking Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Generating Check Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Configuring Tracking Number Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Determining Check Digits For Tracking Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PRO Number Consolidations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Service Manifesting Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Chapter 10 Routing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Routing Guide Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Routing Guide Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Packing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Routing Guide Rule Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Routing Guide Rule Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Routing Criteria Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Dynamic Criteria Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Routing Assignment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Accessorials Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Rule Books Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Branching Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Branching Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Exclusion Rule Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Exclusion Rule Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Exception Rule Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Exception Rule Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Automatic Service Assignment and the Routing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Contents
Determining the Preferred Service for the Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Shipment Fields updated during Route Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rate Shopping and the Routing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Reviewing Rate Shopping Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Service Selection Validation and the Routing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Troubleshooting Routing Guide Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Chapter 11 TMS Workflow Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
TMS Shipment Freight Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Configuring TMS Workflow Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Rate Shop Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Manifest Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Documents Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Address Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Routes, References and Containers Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuring Transaction Toolbar TMS Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Chapter 12 Desktop Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Shipment Wizard Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Template Setup Explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configuring Desktop Shipping Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Origin/Destination Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Compliance Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Package Details Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Products Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Method/References Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Services Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Accessorials Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Documents Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Summary Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Confirmation Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Creating a Return Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Help Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Loading Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Approval Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Chapter 13 TMS Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
vii
viii
Administration Guide — Base Web UI
Rate Shop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
EOD Manifest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Cancel or Reprint Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Recall Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Drop-Off Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Change Summary
The following table summarizes significant differences between this document and previous
versions.
Date/Version
Description
Reference
March 2014/vS36
Initial version
--
x
Administration Guide — TMS
Chapter 1
TMS Concepts
This section describes the purpose of the Transportation Management System (TMS) functionality.
2
Describes the TMS module in PRECISION.
Overview
2
Distinguishes between PRECISION network and non-integrated carriers.
Carrier Types
3
Describes at a high level the basic steps involved in setting up TMS.
Implementing TMS
6
Describes the structure and workflow of a shipment in PRECISION.
Shipping
2
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
Before you read this guide, it is important that you are familiar with the Web UI TMS
functionality. See User Guide: Transportation Management System.
TMS is a set of components that enables you to use PRECISION to ship with multiple carriers.
Some of these carriers allow for integration with their systems in accordance with a set of interface
requirements they prescribe. With TMS, you can use a single system at the shipping dock to:
• Interface to ERP and WMS.
• Generate carrier compliant labels to one printer.
Carrier Types
For the purposes of PRECISION, there are two types of carrier:
• Integrated parcel carriers
• Non-integrated TL/LTL carriers
Integrated Carriers
Integrated carriers—also known as PRECISION network carriers—are parcel carriers that have a
certification or accreditation agreement with Precision. Each certification/accreditation requires:
• Carrier-compliant labels in the correct layout and format.
• Carrier-compliant EOD files for communication of shipment transaction data.
• A carrier-certified approved set of test cases proving that the system covers all requirements.
TMS ensures that integration with each parcel carrier behaves according to the strict
certification/accreditation process by following the prescribed rules set out by each carrier. TMS
must remain within these rules to retain its certification/accreditation status. Therefore, TMS is
tested extensively to ensure that the system remains within carrier-specified parameters. No
changes to label structures or formats can be carried out without the permission and approval of
the carrier.
Each integrated carrier has its own rating engine within PRECISION. This rating engine is used to
calculate rates for carrier services. Examples of integrated carriers are UPS, FedEx, and DHL.
Non-integrated Carriers
Non-integrated carriers—also known as TL/LTL carriers for the purposes of this document—are
road haulage, sea freight, and some smaller parcel carriers that are not integrated with
PRECISION. For these carriers, you must upload rates and create carrier services manually. These
carriers may not have rules on label structure formats or EOD files. These carriers may also
provide you with rates in different structure formats. Using PRECISION, you can upload or create
rates and create carriers and services in PRECISION.
There are two rating engines available for calculating charges for non-integrated carriers. After
you configure the non-integrated carriers, PRECISION works in much the same way for these as it
does for integrated carriers.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Concepts
3
Implementing TMS
Planning is required before you begin a TMS implementation. Important questions to answer
include:
• What locations do you ship from?
• Where do you ship to?
• What carriers and services do you use?
• What payment methods do you use?
When you implement TMS, follow four fundamental steps:
• Set up master data. For example, you need Packing Locations, Internal IDs, carriers, charges,
zones, and other system data.
• Create Carrier Services. Based on the different services offered by the carrier, create the
appropriate services. These services can subsequently be associated with rate structures.
• Create Charge Tables. Charge Tables are rate structures supplied by your carriers. The Charge
Tables detail the rates for shipping goods between prescribed carrier zones. The Charge Tables
contain details of the rate basis, the charge for each zone combination, and the charges for
other services (known as accessorials) that the carrier provides. You can manually create
Charge Tables or upload them from Excel or CSV files.
• Create Routing Guide rules. To make a Carrier Service available to be assigned to a shipment,
set up Routing Guide rules. The Routing Guide specifies rules that enable PRECISION to
return only those Carrier Services that meet the rule criteria.
Note For more details on the Routing Guide, see Chapter 10, “Routing Guide,” on page 137.
Fig. 1.1
TMS Implementation Steps
Set up Master Data
Create Services
Create Charge Tables
Create Routing Guide Rules
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
4
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Note Figure 1.1 does not include configuring shipment structure. It is also important to set up
your Web UI shipment screens to include the fields you need.
Master Data
For integrated carriers, PRECISION master data is set up for you and supplied by the Precision
Content Group as part of an XML/PSL file installation. The master data provided includes:
• Packing locations and internal IDs
• Carriers and services
• Rate structures
• Zone structures
• Documents and labels
• Freight payment and duty payment methods
Carrier Services
Carriers provide a transportation service to shippers. Some carriers provide variations on the
transportation that they provide, usually based on method of transportation or different time-intransit to the same destination. These variations also mean a variation in freight rates. In
PRECISION, a service represents the service provided by the carrier. The rates are separate for
each service.
Example Carrier A provides a service to transport goods from the shipper to any destination. One
set of rates is negotiated for this service. This example is configured as a single service in
PRECISION.
Example Carrier B provides a service to transport goods from the shipper to any destination. Two
sets of rates are provided based on the time-in-transit. One set of rates is for a 2-day service, and
the second set of rates is for a 3-day service. This example is configured as two services in
PRECISION.
Each service in the PRECISION database is separate because:
• When the shipper is determining the type of service—for example, air or ground—that applies
to the shipment, only one service is to be associated with the shipment header.
• The configuration of the Routing Guide for routing assignment and rate shopping is based on
service. The Routing Guide determines the service assigned to the shipment or the set of
services displayed in rate shopping.
The determination of charge calculation methodology is associated with the service, not with the
carrier. A carrier usually provides more than one service. Therefore, each service must have its
own charge calculation method.
A service is also known as a route. The Routes table contains the services provided to the shipper
by the carriers. In the Web UI, create and maintain services at System Settings|TMS Master Data|
Route or by using the QuickPath option RT.
For integrated carriers, Precision Content Group provides the carrier routing data as part of an
XML/PSL file installation. For TL/LTL carriers, you create Carrier Services manually in the
PRECISION application.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Concepts
5
Carrier Accessorial Services
In addition to the basic service of getting the package from origin to destination, carriers
sometimes provide extra services known as accessorials. Such services usually involve an
additional charge. Therefore, the additional service must be flagged by the customer as appropriate
to the shipment being shipped. The available additional services apply only to some carrier
services. Therefore, additional services are set up against individual services. For example,
Delivery Confirmation as an additional service might be provided domestically but not
internationally.
You can access the Carrier Accessorials through the Route Surcharges sub-option in RT by
clicking any line in the Route table. The fields in this table enable you to specify an accessorial
(also known as a surcharge) or accessorials to associate with a service.
For integrated carriers, accessorial data is supplied by the Precision Content Group as part of an
XML/PSL file installation.
Carrier Routing Data - Precision Network
Carrier Routing information must be kept up-to-date for integrated carriers to expedite the
movement of the packages through the carrier network. Routing data is used for printing additional
information on the carrier label to expedite sorting at the carrier hubs. It may also be used to
determine whether the service is available between the origin and destination. This data is
formatted by the Precision Content Group and circulated to customers in a PSL installation file.
Cost Types
A service typically generates a freight charge. Apart from the freight charge, accessorials that also
generate a charge may be applied. The cost types that form the list of charges and surcharges you
can assign to carrier services are held in Charge/Revenue Maintenance.
There must be separate cost types for each carrier service and its additional accessorial services,
because these may be used to determine processing particular to that carrier. It also makes it easier
to recognize the service type provided in the calculated charge lines. These maintained records
contain a description of the Charge/Revenue code and the service type; for example, Delivery
Confirmation - Signature Required.
For integrated carriers, the Precision Content Group supplies this data as part of an XML/PSL file
installation. In the Web UI, the cost types are listed under System Settings|TMS Master Data|
Charge/Revenues or by using the QuickPath option CH.
Charge Tables
Each carrier has specific rate and zone data. This data is used with specific algorithms to determine
freight cost estimates. Some carriers provide this information directly to Precision on request.
Other carriers provide the data only to the shipper. Precision supplies carrier rate and zone data to
the shipper as part of a PSL installation file for Precision network carriers.
Precision does not provide carrier and zone data for TL/LTL carriers. You must upload rates from
files or create them manually within PRECISION.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
6
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Routing Guide
The Routing Guide implements rules to assign a service to a shipment. Alternatively, the Routing
Guide can return a set of possible services for you to choose from. See Chapter 10, “Routing
Guide,” on page 137.
Shipping
After you set up your system, you can use PRECISION to manage your shipping process. This
section describes the structure of a shipment and the basic workflow from the creation to the
shipping of a shipment.
Shipment Structure
The information required for a shipment depends on the carrier and the service. Generally, the
pieces of information in Table 1.1 are required, whether the shipment is being shipped using a
PRECISION network carrier or TL/LTL carrier.
Table 1.1 
Basic Parcel Shipment Information
Information
Details
Shipper
The company name, address, and phone number of the party shipping the goods. To
enable shipment processing, the address information must be stored in the
individual fields supplied.
Ship To
The company name, address, and phone number of the party receiving the goods.
The address information must be stored in the individual fields supplied for it to
enable shipment processing.
Shipper Contact
The person the carrier can contact if there is a problem with the shipment. The
contact is usually the shipping officer.
Packing
The shipment item lines must be packed to ensure that correct package contents
details can be passed to the carrier. For integrated carriers, you must use individual
package records. You cannot process a shipment if the number of similars on a
package record is greater than one because unique records are required for the
unique tracking number conventions used by the carriers.
Despatch Date
This information determines the rate structure applicable and the expected delivery
date of the packages being shipped.
Carrier
The party transporting the goods from the Shipper to the Ship To. In PRECISION,
the carrier can be derived from the service.
Service
The agreed service method by which the carrier is to deliver the goods, including
the transport mode and agreed transit period.
Accessorials
Accessorials are characteristics set against the shipment in additional to the
standard items of the selected service; for example, Saturday Delivery and
Signature Required.
Freight Payment
Method
This information determines who is responsible for the payment of freight charges;
for example, the shipper or the customer.
Shipment Workflow
The workflows for shipping a PRECISION network parcel shipment and a non-integrated TL/LTL
shipment require different configuration. However, the basic workflow is similar. Figure 1.2
displays a typical shipment workflow.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Concepts
7
Fig. 1.2
Typical Shipment Workflow
Create Shipment
Pack Shipment
Rating Process
Generate Tracking Number
Print Label Close Shipment
Ship Product
Print Shipping Documents
Apply Label
End of Day Process
Creating
A TMS shipment can be created in one of the following ways:
• The shipment is interfaced from an ERP system, such as QAD.
• The shipment is created through an SOA message.
• A user creates the shipment through the Web or Windows UI.
All shipments have the same database structure.
Packing
Individual shipment item lines are explicitly associated with particular packages. This association
ensures that the program logic can determine the breakdown of a shipment into individual
packages.
Note Packing is not covered in this guide. For more details on packing, see User Guide: Base
Web UI and Administration Guide: Base Web UI.
Rating
For PRECISION network carriers, each carrier has its own rating engine and its own prescribed
rate structure.
For TL/LTL carriers, the rating process calculates the rates using one of two engines available for
TL/LTL carriers. When the shipment is rated, the relevant rating engine is called and the estimated
costs are generated for association with the shipment. These costs are calculated according to the
characteristics of the shipment being processed, and based on the rate structure defined for the
carrier service.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
8
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Note If you subsequently need to stop the shipment from being shipped, you can void the
shipment. For more details, see Chapter 11, “TMS Workflow Tasks,” on page 165.
Generating Tracking Numbers and Labels
For PRECISION network carriers, tracking numbers and labels are generated automatically in
carrier-approved formats. Most carriers track at a package level and tracking numbers are unique
for each package. However, some carriers still track at shipment level and the tracking number is
the same for each package on the shipment.
For TL/LTL carriers, the process to set up tracking numbers must be configured for each carrier.
You can use a generic label supplied with PRECISION or create a label for a particular carrier.
When configured, tracking numbers and labels are assigned and printed for the shipment in the
same way as for PRECISION network carriers. Not all TL/LTL carriers use tracking numbers or
labels.
Printing Documents
PRECISION network carriers have specific documents that you must print in carrier-approved
format. For TL/LTL carriers, the documentation requirements vary. You may also decide to print
some documents for your own purposes.
Note Documents are not covered in this guide. For more details on documents, see Topic 025 on
the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|PRECISION Reference Guides|
Base.
Closing Shipments
You can set a shipment to close automatically or it can be a manual process.
EOD (End of Day or End of Batch)
At a particular time during a shipping day, a carrier or carriers collect the shipments ready for
shipping. To make a shipment ready for shipping, the user adds it to an EOD Manifest, which is
created based on carrier, Packing Location, or other criteria. The EOD screen in the Web UI
enables you to select the batch of shipments for collection. For most carriers in the PRECISION
network, an electronic manifest file is generated and communicated to the carrier. The system can
also generate a paper manifest when required by the carrier.
When the packages or shipments leave your Packing Location, they enter the carrier network. You
can use Package Exception Management (PEM) to track your packages and shipments. For more
details, see Administration Guide: Package Exception Management and User Guide: Package
Exception Management.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 2
Packing Locations
This section describes the relationship between carrier accounts, Packing Locations, and Internal
IDs.
Overview
10
Introduces carrier accounts.
10
Defines and explains Internal IDs.
Internal ID
Packing Location
11
Defines and explains Packing Locations.
10
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
As part of the TMS implementation, you configure shipper carrier accounts for each business unit
or site that does the shipping. A shipper carrier account is an account that the shipper holds with
the carrier for billing and shipping purposes. Each carrier account is associated with an Internal ID,
and each Internal ID is associated with one or more Packing Locations. This master data setup is
generally done by Precision.
Internal ID
A shipper ships goods from a shipper location. Typically, each shipper location has a set of shipper
carrier accounts, grouped together for accounting purposes. The set of carrier accounts has its own
Internal ID, which is a five-character value consisting of a letter followed by four digits; for
example, A9982. An Internal ID is a unique identifier assigned by the Precision Content Group to
a set of carrier accounts.
Fig. 2.1
Internal ID
Internal ID A9901
Shipper Location
FedEx Account
UPS Account
TNT Account
Dachser Account
In some circumstances, a physical shipper location has more than one Internal ID. For example, in
Figure 2.2, the Marketing group and the Production group are based at the same shipper location.
However, the organization treats each group separately for accounting purposes. Therefore, there
are two Internal IDs, each with its own set of carrier accounts.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Packing Locations
11
Fig. 2.2
Multiple Internal IDs
A9901
Shipper Location
FedEx Account
UPS Account
Marketing
TNT Account
A9902
FedEx Account
UPS Account
TNT Account
Production
Dachser Account
The Precision Content Group uses the Internal ID to configure all the required account data for the
carriers implemented for the shipper. The Internal ID ensures that each configuration:
• Is unique.
• Can be provided directly from the Precision Content Group to the project team implementing
PRECISION.
• Is consistent at the shipping site and in the Precision TMS Content database. Therefore, any
problem that the shipper encounters can be replicated in the Precision TMS Content and
Support databases.
The typical data configured against an Internal ID includes:
• A carrier account—one for each carrier
• A carrier tracking number range
• A carrier pickup number for EOD processing
• Other carrier configuration data for label and EOD file processing
• Carrier rating configuration factors
Packing Location
A Packing Location is a logical area from which you ship packages. It is typically a physical
location where the carrier picks up outgoing packages.
To create a Packing Location in the Web UI:
1
Open the partners screen using the NR QuickPath code.
2
To create a Packing Location, click Create.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
12
3
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Set up a new partner. Ensure that the Packing Location name is related to an Internal ID and
contains as few characters as possible, as displayed in Figure 2.3.
Fig. 2.3
Create Packing Location
4
Select the Delivered From partner role.
5
Select the In Use flag for the partner.
Internal ID Relationship
The Packing Location is related to the Internal ID. The Packing Location is the physical use of the
set of carrier accounts making up the Internal ID. The Packing Location is important for EOD
processing, because an EOD manifest is generated for each Packing Location.
Note For more information on the EOD manifest, see Chapter 13, “TMS Menu Options,” on
page 209.
Fig. 2.4
Internal ID Packing Location Relationship
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Packing Locations
13
Associate the Packing Location with the Internal ID using a system value:
Table 2.1 Packing Location - Internal ID Relationship
Category
Key
Value
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - [Packing Location]
[Internal ID]
Example 1: A TRAX LOCATION ID -A9901
Example 1: A9901
Example 2: A TRAX LOCATION ID -A9982
Example 2: A9982
In the example, Packing Location A9901 is associated with an Internal ID of A9901, and Packing
Location A9982 is associated with Internal ID A9982. If possible, configure the Packing Location
ID to match the Internal ID, as displayed in Figure 2.4. Matching names make the site
configuration easier to find in the Precision Support database.
In some instances, you can have multiple Packing Locations for one Internal ID. For example, part
of your warehouse is used to group electronic goods shipments and part of the warehouse is used
to group paper product shipments. One set of shipments is collected at 15:00 and the second set is
not closed out until 18:00. The same Internal ID is used for accounting purposes but there are two
separate Packing Locations, each with its own EOD manifest.
Table 2.2 Packing Location - Internal ID Relationship
Category
Key
Value
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - [Packing Location]
[Internal ID]
A TRAX LOCATION ID -A444E
A4440
A TRAX LOCATION ID -A444P
Client Relationship
Consider a client to be a business unit. A client is used to separate the transactions within the
application, mainly from a workflow perspective. Typically, you set up clients according to
physical location. For example, if a company has warehouses in Rotterdam, Coventry, and
Chicago, the administrator sets up a client for each location. Therefore, there is typically a 1:1
relationship between the client and Packing Location. However, you can choose other possible
client to Packing Location relationships, as in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3 
Client Packing Location Relationship
Relationship
Explanation
One client to one
Packing Location
The most common configuration. The easiest naming convention is to give the Packing
Location the same name as the PRECISION client.
One client to many
Packing Locations
This configuration typically occurs when there is a single warehouse where all
shipments are held in one PRECISION client. However, the warehouse is divided into
different logical groupings of shipper accounts because the shipper has multiple business
units located in a single warehouse or ships some packages through zone-skipping.
Many clients to one
Packing Location
This configuration occurs if the shipments are divided by the PRECISION client for
different divisions within the warehouse, but the freight is processed as one logical
grouping. In this case, the shipper can split their PRECISION shipments by division, but
use the same set of accounts to handle carrier freight costs.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
14
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
To limit the Packing Locations used by a particular client, configure the system value CLIENT
LOCATIONS - <CLIENT>. Only the available Packing Locations are then displayed to the user.
The administrator can configure a default Packing Location for a user on the User screen. Select
the desired Packing Location from the Deliver From field.
Note A full list of relevant system values and their functions are contained in the Packing
DomainLookups tab of Appendix A on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation
Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
How to Choose the Packing Location for Shipping
To process a shipment, associate it with a Packing Location, which the user chooses at login time.
The user can change the Packing Location in the Web UI:
• On the Web UI home page in the Session Details link.
• At shipment level in the Workflow Portal by running the manifest workflow task.
Typical Configuration Scenarios
The examples in this section cover typical configuration scenarios for PRECISION Clients,
Packing Locations, and Internal IDs.
Example To set up one business unit with one set of carrier shipper accounts, you configure:
• One PRECISION Client.
• One Internal ID, which the Precision Content Group configures.
• One Packing Location pointing to the Internal ID.
Table 2.4 System Values
Category
Key
Value
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - FR1
A9901
Example To set up one business unit with two sets of carrier shipper accounts for two separate
business franchises at the same shipping address, you configure:
• One PRECISION Client.
• Two Internal IDs, which the Precision Content Group configures.
• Two Packing Locations, each pointing to an Internal ID.
Table 2.5 System Values
Category
Key
Value
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - FR1
A9901
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - FR2
A9902
Example To set up two business units that use the same set of carrier accounts, you configure:
• Two PRECISION clients.
• One Internal ID, which the Precision Content Group configures.
• One Packing Location pointing to the Internal ID.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Packing Locations
15
Table 2.6 System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - SITE1
A9901
In another scenario, a shipper has two separate carrier pickups at EOD for each business unit, one
at 14:00 and one at 16:00. In this case, the shipper can separate the groupings of packages by
creating two separate Packing Locations. However, each location uses the same set of carrier
accounts, so they also have the same Internal ID.
Table 2.7 System Values
Category
Key
Value
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - BU1
A9901
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - BU2
A9901
Example To set up two business units with separate sets of carrier accounts, you configure:
• Two PRECISION clients.
• Two Internal IDs, which the Precision Content Group configures.
• Two Packing Locations, each one pointing to an Internal ID.
Table 2.8 System Values
Category
Key
Value
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - FR1
A9901
SPS
A TRAX LOCATION ID - FR2
A9902
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
16
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 3
Charges Master Data
This section describes how to set up extra master data for charges.
18
Describes the master data that is needed before setting up rate structures.
Overview
18
Describes the different charge-related options you can use to configure system data.
Charges
18
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
Charges are incurred by shippers when shipping goods to customers. Possible charges include
freight, insurance, duty, and handling. The shipper can choose to pass on these charges to the
customer at the same or at a different rate.
You can set up charges in advance of a shipment and assign them as a rule to the relevant party. It
is possible to manually add charges at shipment time or to set up a Rate Structure to automatically
calculate them. The estimated shipment charges may be printed on customer invoices, when
required.
You can calculate charges down to a line level or at shipment level. However, you can change or
enter additional costs at shipment maintenance level. Charges can be defined in any currency and
converted to shipment currency.
Charges
Before you can create rate structures in PRECISION, the associated charge types must exist in the
database. PRECISION is supplied with out-of-the-box charge types and other master data.
However, you may need to configure further master data to support the TL/LTL carrier services
used by your organization.
To access the set of tables that relate to charges in the Web UI, choose System Settings|TMS
Master Data. The relevant items on this menu are:
• Charge / Revenue (CH)
• Charge Class (GC)
• Charge Category (CG)
• Charge Summary Group for Documents (Y5)
• Allocation Methods (AL)
Charge/Revenue
The CH option enables you to create cost types, as displayed in Figure 3.1.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Charges Master Data
19
Fig. 3.1
Charge/revenue
The following fields are available when creating a new charge:
Charge/revenue. Enter a Charge/revenue code of up to six characters. This field is mandatory.
Description. Enter a meaningful description of the purpose of the cost type. This field is
mandatory.
Summarise in bucket. Use the lookup to choose a Summary Bucket to categorize the charge
type for printing at the foot of certain invoices. Create Summary Buckets in option Y5.
Charge Class. Use this field to group charges together. It can be used when interfacing back
from PRECISION to a sales order system to update financial accounts. You create Charge
Class categories in option GC.
Charge Type. Select whether the charge is a cost or revenue.
Recoverable/Operation Code. Available for future use.
Temp charge during calcs. If the calculation applies a temporary charge until calculation is
complete, select this field.
Reversing resulting polarity/Use FOB shipment value/Include shipment value/Total invoice
charges only. Available for future use.
Convert to ship currency. When selected, during the charge calculation, the calculated charge
stored into the database is converted to the currency in the shipment header.
Self Billing/Convert to actual/Allow actuals. Available for future use.
Round-up charge. Available for future use.
Total only pre-tax value/Customs Clearance/Additional flag 23, 24, 25. Available for future
use.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
20
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Delivery terms 1-9. Delivery Terms—or INCOTERMS—are internationally recognized codes
that indicate who pays for delivery of goods. If the shipment delivery term matches the value
in one of these fields, the charge is flagged as invoiceable.
User defined 01 to 20. Available for future use.
Tax Type. If tax is calculated for the charge, specify a tax type.
Allocate method. If the charge cost is calculated over a group of shipments, the charge is split
over the shipments. Use this field when load building. Creating a load of more than one
shipment enables you to find the cheapest rate per shipment.
Allow Allocations. Available for future use.
P&L Summary Group/B/L Summary Group/Invoice Summary Group. Available for future use.
Prt B/L. Available for future use.
Prt on Inv. To print the charge on the invoice, select this field.
Sum. on B/L/Sum on Inv/Cost bucket. Available for future use.
Agent split/EDI code/Supplier Type/Use the maximum ship rate. Available for future use.
Charge category. To categorize the charge, use the lookup to choose a charge/revenue group.
A charge/revenue category groups charges by their type. You create charge/revenue categories
in option CG.
User Defined 1-5. These fields are available for future use.
Service Type. To indicate the service type for the charge being maintained, select a service
type. For more information on service types, see User Guide: Transportation Management
System.
Landed cost allocate method. If required, indicate the method to use for landed cost
allocation.
Charge Class
Use charge classes—option GC—to associate charges with GL accounts. If PRECISION is
integrated with a financial software package such as QAD Enterprise Financials, costs calculated
by PRECISION may get charged to GL accounts that exist in the financial system. The option GC
enables you to create matching accounts in PRECISION.
To open the Charge Class option, use the fast path code GC or choose System Settings|TMS
Master Data|Charge Class. When you create a charge class, the following fields are available:
Charge class. The code for this charge class. This field is mandatory.
Description. Enter the description of the charge class to be associated with a charge code. The
charge class can be used to group charges together. It can also be used when PRECISION is
interfaced with a sales order processing system to update financial accounts. This field is
mandatory.
G/L normal account. If PRECISION is to interface costs to a normal GL account, enter the
account number from the interfacing system.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Charges Master Data
21
G/L accrual account. If PRECISION is to interface costs to a GL accrual account, enter the
account number from the interfacing system.
G/L prepayment account. If PRECISION is to interface costs to a GL prepayment account,
enter the account number from the interfacing system.
G/L intransit account. If PRECISION is to interface costs to a GL intransit account, enter the
account number from the interfacing system.
User Defined Fields 1 to 9. These fields are for future use.
Charge Category
Charge categories—option CG—enable you to create categories for your charges. You can create
categories such as Insurance, Freight, or Documentation. The CG option contains two fields.
Category Code. Enter a code for the category being maintained. This field is mandatory.
Description. Enter a meaningful description of the category code.
Charge Summary Group for Documents
Summary groups—option Y5—are used for categories of enumeration at the foot of certain
invoices such as those from Canada, Gambia, Zambia, and Nigeria. The summary groups allow
you to define the listed category into which costs fall. The parameters are used by certain invoice
print programs to decide the category in which the cost is to be displayed.
Fig. 3.2
Charge Summary Group for Documents
Typically, these documents require that all costs displayed in the body of the invoice are
summarized in a predefined table at the foot of document. This table requires the value and
currency for the cost category to be displayed and whether the cost has been included in the
invoice total. Summary groups are for documentation purposes only and do not affect the
calculation of charges.
To access this option, type Y5 in the QuickPath or choose System Settings|Base|Application
Configuration|Documents|Charge Summary Group for Documents.
Summary bucket. Enter the code for this summary bucket.
Description. Enter a meaningful description of the charge summary group.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
22
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
In the newly created summary bucket, you can maintain any number of Charge Summary Group
Charges. Open the sub-option Charge Summary Group Charges and create new entries for the
bucket.
Client, Summary Bucket. These fields are read only.
Charge Code. Select the relevant charge code to associate with this charge summary group.
In use. To include the code in the Summary Bucket, select this field.
Allocation Methods
To access option AL, choose System Settings|TMS Master Data|Allocation Methods or enter AL
in the QuickPath. If the charge cost is calculated over a group of shipments, the allocation method
is the basis by which the charge is split over the shipments that share this charge.
Allocation Method. Select an allocation method.
Description. Enter a description such as gross weight or volume. This field is mandatory.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 4
Carriers: Precision Network
This section describes how to set up PRECISION network carriers for shipping.
24
Describes the PRECISION network carrier configuration that administrators may need to know.
Overview
24
Describes how to view carrier services and their associated accessorials.
Carrier Services
26
Describes how the system identifies the carrier account to charge for shipping.
Accounts
27
Describes how carrier routing data is used and maintained.
Routing Data
27
Describes the use of rates and zones.
Rates and Zones
28
Provides information on where to find out about customizing carrier labels.
Carrier Labels Customization
28
Describes how to update tracking numbers for each integrated carrier.
Carrier Tracking Number Ranges
24
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
The configuration for integrated carriers is done by Precision. As an administrator, you need to
know where to find configuration information. You must also know what to do when your carriers
provide updated rate information or when a tracking number range expires.
Carrier Availability and Functionality
Note For full details on carrier availability and functionality, refer to the Appendix, which is
available on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|PRECISION
Reference Guides|Appendices. The Appendix includes:
• Currently integrated carriers
• Services available for each carrier
• Functionality/services available in PRECISION
• Requirements for integrating with each carrier
• Countries where carrier integrations can be implemented
Carrier Services
The Routes table contains the different services that the carriers provide. The Routes table in the
Web UI is under System Settings|TMS Master Data|Route or by using the QuickPath option RT, as
displayed in Figure 4.1.
Fig. 4.1
Routes Table
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
25
The data you see in this table is supplied by the Precision Content Group as part of an XML/PSL
file installation. The relevant fields on the Services create or update screen are:
Route code. This field contains a meaningful service code.
Start date. This date is when the route becomes valid.
Description. Enter a meaningful description of this route; for example, FedEx Priority
Overnight Domestic.
Extended Description. This field contains the extended description of the route. Originally,
this field contained the service code, the carrier engine program, the type of service, and the
alternative code.
Normal transport mode. This field specifies if the service uses ground, air, sea, or some other
type of transport.
Alternative Code. Enter an alternative code, which is the interpretation of the route code by the
carrier when mapping is being carried out for the EOD process.
Carrier. Enter the carrier that offers the service.
Program. The name of the carrier engine program.
Domestic. If the route is domestic, select this field.
Carrier Service Additional Services
You can access the Route Surcharges sub-option in Services by selecting any line in the Route
table and selecting the sub-option. The field columns in this table are:
Surcharge Type. Specifies the Charge Revenue code to associate with this service. For each
service, you can add any number of charges that can be calculated using one or many of the
predefined calculation methods.
Alternative Code. This field contains a user-defined alternative charge code. It is not validated
against the charge code table and is for reference purposes only.
In Use. Enter 0 for no and 1 for yes.
Additional services data is supplied by the Precision Content Group as part of an XML/PSL file
installation.
Cost Types
In the Web UI, the charge tables are under System Settings|TMS Master Data|Charge/Revenues or
by using the QuickPath option CH. The most important fields in these maintained records are the
Charge/Revenue code and the description of the service type such as Saturday Delivery and
Delivery Confirmation. This data is supplied by the Precision Content Group as part of an
XML/PSL file installation.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
26
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 4.2
Charge/Revenues
Accounts
Shippers and customers have carrier accounts with integrated carriers that enable service charges
to be billed to the correct party. The freight payment method determines if the shipper, receiver, or
a third party account is billed for the service.
The freight payment methods available are determined by the carrier and service you choose. For
example, some payment methods are available for domestic shipping but not for international. For
more information on the freight payment methods supplied with PRECISION, See chapter 3 of
User Guide: Transportation Management System, available on the document library. Table 4.1
displays the carrier account that is billed for each freight payment method.
Table 4.1 
Freight Payment Account Charges
Freight Payment Method
Carrier Account Charged
Prepaid
Shipper account
Prepaid (+Add)
Shipper account
COD
Shipper account
Collect
The account is specified on the Rating screen. If no account is indicated,
the Ship To customer address is charged, when the carrier allows this
approach.
Consignee Bill
The account is specified on the Rating screen. If no account is indicated,
the Ship To customer address is charged, when the carrier allows this
approach.
Third Party
The account is specified on the Rating screen.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
27
However, when the account is determined from a particular address partner, the account value is
retrieved by finding the Contact Type from the system value displayed in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 
System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
Key: [carrier]: CARRIER CONTACT TYPE
[contact type]
for example:
for example:
UPS: CARRIER CONTACT TYPE
UP
The address-associated account is in the NR account sub-option NRCR, as displayed in Figure 4.3.
Fig. 4.3
NRCR
The carrier contact type is held in XMCRAC0.CRAACCT and the account number is held in
XMCRAC0.CRAACCN.
Duty/Tax Payment Methods
Some carriers have a separate Duty/Tax Payment Method. This field is used to determine if the
shipper, recipient, or a third party pays the duties and taxes for international shipments. The
Duty/Tax payment methods available in PRECISION match those methods available for the
selected carrier service.
Routing Data
Each of the integrated carriers provides updates to Precision whenever routing data changes. This
data is formatted by Precision and circulated to customers in an easy-to-load PSL installation file.
Rates and Zones
Each carrier has specific rate and zone data. This data is used with specific algorithms to determine
freight estimates. Some carriers provide this information directly to Precision on request. Other
carriers provide the data only to the shipper. The general rules are:
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
28
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
• Published rates and zones, available to all shippers for a PRECISION integrated SPS carrier
and accessible directly from the carrier, are circulated to all shippers using this carrier at no
cost to the shipper.
• For published accessorials, the same rule applies.
• The shipper or the carrier must provide negotiated rates and zones to Precision. The
information requires reformatting before distribution to the shipper. This service work is
billable to the shipper.
• If rates and zones configuration is only available from the carrier, the shipper or carrier must
provide the configuration to Precision. The configuration data requires reformatting before
distribution to the shipper. This work is billable service work to the shipper.
Precision supplies carrier rate and zone data to the shipper as part of an XML/PSL installation file.
Carrier Labels Customization
For details on the available functionality, see the PRECISION Reference Guide Topic072 on the
QAD Document Library.
Carrier Tracking Number Ranges
It is recommended that you configure PRECISION to send email notifications to the relevant users
when a tracking number range is going to expire. This email is useful when a range expires outside
of carrier helpline working hours. The system values to configure email notifications are:
• TRACKING RANGE FROM USER
• TRACKING RANGE MESSAGES
• TRACKING RANGE METHOD
• TRACKING RANGE THRESHOLD: <carrier>
Note For full details on these system values, see the SPS tab of Appendix A on the QAD
Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
Calberson
See Geodis.
Canada Post
Canada Post tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Canpar
Canpar tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
29
Chrono Expres
When the tracking number range expires, contact Chrono Expres to request a new tracking number
range, specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
Configuring Tracking Number Range for Chrono Expres
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges. These ranges have the naming
convention in Table 4.3, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision Content
Group provides. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision Content
Group. Update the system values with your tracking numbers.
Table 4.3 
Chrono Expres System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
CHEX: [Internal ID] SEQ MAX
End of range
SPS
CHEX: [Internal ID] SEQ MIN
Start of range
SPS
CHEX: [Internal ID] SEQ NEXT
Start of range
Table 4.4 
Chrono Expres System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
CHEX: [A9911] TRK NO MAX
29999
SPS
CHEX: [A9911] TRK NO MIN
10000
SPS
CHEX: [A9911] TRK NO NEXT
10000
Chronopost
Chronopost tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Ciblex
Ciblex tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
City Link
The tracking numbers for this integration type are generated on the City Link application side so
no maintenance is required within the PRECISION application.
Dachser
Dachser tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
30
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
DB Schenker (US Domestic)
When the tracking number range expires, contact DB Schenker to request a new tracking number
range, specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
• Domestic tracking numbers are required
The number to contact is 800-233-1779.
Note The tracking number ranges previously applied to Bax Global. DB Schenker acquired Bax
Global in 2006.
Configuring Tracking Number Range for DB Schenker US Domestic
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges. These ranges have the naming
convention in Table 4.5, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision Content
Group provides. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision Content
Group. Update the system values with your tracking numbers.
Table 4.5 
DB Schenker US Domestic System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
BAX: [Internal ID] TRK NO MAX
End of range
SPS
BAX: [Internal ID] TRK NO MIN
Start of range
SPS
BAX: [Internal ID] TRK NO NEXT
Start of range
Important The maximum length of a DB Schenker tracking number for US Domestic is 8 digits.
If you receive a 9 digit tracking number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which is
calculated by PRECISION at the time of shipping. If the range values are longer than 9 digits,
contact the Precision Content Group.
Example If DB Schenker provides a tracking range 56799360 to 56866381 for Internal ID
A9905, configure the values displayed in Table 4.6. If DB Schenker provides a tracking range
567993604 to 568663817, configure the system values in the same way, omitting the check digit at
the end.
Table 4.6 
DB Schenker US Domestic System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
BAX: [A9905] TRK NO MAX
56799360
SPS
BAX: [A9905] TRK NO MIN
56799360
SPS
BAX: [A9905] TRK NO NEXT
56866381
DB Schenker (International)
DB Schenker International Shipping includes shipping from US to Canada. When the tracking
number range expires, contact DB Schenker to request a new tracking number range, specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
31
• International tracking numbers are required
The number to contact is 800-233-1779.
Configuring Tracking Number Range for DB Schenker International
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.7, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group provides. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group. Update the system values with your tracking numbers.
Table 4.7 
DB Schenker System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
BXI: [Internal ID] TRK NO MAX
End of range
SPS
BXI: [Internal ID] TRK NO MIN
Start of range
SPS
BXI: [Internal ID] TRK NO NEXT
Start of range
Note The maximum length of a DB Schenker tracking number for International is 7 digits. If you
receive an 8-digit number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION
calculates at the time of shipping. If the numbers are longer than 8 digits, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Example If DB Schenker provides a tracking range 5679936 to 5686638, for Internal ID A9905,
configure the values as displayed in Table 4.8. If DB Schenker provides a tracking range
56799360 to 56866381, configure the values in the same way, omitting the check digit in the setup.
Table 4.8 
DB Schenker System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
BXI: [A9905] TRK NO MAX
5679936
SPS
BXI: [A9905] TRK NO MIN
5679936
SPS
BXI: [A9905] TRK NO NEXT
5686638
DHL (Express) – US Origin – SAS Version
This section refers to the maintenance of Tracking Numbers of DHL for US origin, where the SAS
version of integration is in use. For US origin, this relates to DHL SAS-based accounts only.
When the tracking number range expires, contact DHL to obtain a new tracking number range,
specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
• The unit ID, which can be determined from the system value in Table 4.9, where [Internal ID]
is the unique identifier that the Precision Content Group . If you are unsure about your
[Internal ID] value, contact the Precision Content Group.
Table 4.9 
DHL Unit ID System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
DHU: [Internal ID] UNIT ID
Internal ID
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
32
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
To contact DHL:
• Email: [email protected]
• Phone: 281-885-8829 or 866-416-3390 ext. 8829
Configuring Tracking Number Ranges for DHL
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. The naming convention
for US International is displayed in Table 4.10. The [Internal ID] is the unique identifier allocated
by the Precision Content Group. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the
Precision Content Group.
Table 4.10 
DHL US International System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
DHU: [Internal ID] UNITID TRK 10D MAX
End of range
SPS
DHU: [Internal ID] UNITID TRK 10D MIN
Start of range
SPS
DHU: [Internal ID] UNITID TRK 10D NEXT
Start of range
Note The maximum length of a DHL domestic tracking number is 11 digits. If you receive an 11-
digit number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION calculates at the
time of shipping. The maximum length of a DHL international tracking number is 10 digits. If you
receive a 10-digit number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit.
Example If DHL provides a domestic tracking range 7322271019 to 7322321019 for Internal ID
A9905, configure the range as displayed in Table 4.11. If DHL provides a domestic tracking range
73222710194 to 73223210197, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at the
end.
Table 4.11 
DHL US Domestic System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
DHU: A9905 UNITID TRK DOM MIN
7322271019
SPS
DHU: A9905 UNITID TRK DOM NEXT
7322271019
SPS
DHU: A9905 UNITID TRK DOM MAX
7322321019
Example If DHL provides a tracking range 811830125 to 811830626, for Internal ID A9905,
configure the range as displayed in Table 4.12. If DHL provides a tracking range 8118301252 to
8118306268, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at the end.
Table 4.12 
DHL US International System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
DHU: A9905 UNITID TRK 10D MIN
811830125
SPS
DHU: A9905 UNITID TRK 10D NEXT
811830125
SPS
DHU: A9905 UNITID TRK 10D MAX
811830626
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
33
DHL (Express) - Legacy Integration
This section refers to the maintenance of DHL Express services tracking numbers such as WPX
and DOX. When the tracking number range expires, contact DHL to request a new tracking
number range, specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
• The unit ID, which is determined from the system value in Table 4.13. The [Internal ID] is the
unique identifier from the Precision Content Group. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID]
value, then contact the Precision Content Group.
Table 4.13 
DHL Express Unit ID System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
DHL: [Internal ID] UNIT ID
unit ID number
To contact DHL:
• Germany: [email protected]
• Netherlands: [email protected]
• US: [email protected], phone 281-885-8829 or 1-800-420-3101, or 866-416-3390 ext. 8829
• Others: Contact your local DHL account representative or DHL Helpline.
Configuring Tracking Number Range for DHL
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.14, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.14 
DHL Express System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
DHL: [Internal ID] UNIT TRK NO MAX
End of range
SPS
DHL: [Internal ID] UNIT TRK NO MIN
Start of range goes in to this system value
SPS
DHL: [Internal ID] UNIT TRK NO NEXT
Start of range goes in to this system value
Note The maximum length of a DHL tracking number is 10 digits. If you receive a 10 digitnumber, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION calculates at the time of
shipping. If the range values are longer than 10 digits, contact the Precision Content Group.
Example If DHL provides a tracking range 567993609 to 568663819, for Internal ID A9905,
configure the range as displayed in Table 4.15. If DHL provides a tracking range 5679936094 to
5686638197, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at the end.
Table 4.15 
DHL Express System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
DHL: A9905 UNIT TRK NO MIN
567993609
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
34
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Value
SPS
DHL: A9905 UNIT TRK NO NEXT
567993609
SPS
DHL: A9905 UNIT TRK NO MAX
568663819
DHL Time Definite and DHL Day Definite
For DHL TD and DD services, contact Precision Helpdesk for further details.
DHL Global Mail
DHL Global Mail tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when
the maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
DHL XML PI
The tracking numbers for this integration type are generated on the DHL backend so no
maintenance is required within the PRECISION application.
DPD
If the tracking number range that you are using has expired within a year of its issue, contact
Precision. However, if the tracking number range has been in use for over a year, it can be reset to
start again.
Configuring Tracking Number Range for DPD
Separate tracking number ranges are issued for different types of service.
• For COD shipments, use COD tracking numbers.
• For parcel-letter service (DPDLTR), use parcel-letter tracking numbers.
• If the freight payment is prepaid, use miscellaneous tracking numbers for small parcel service
(DPDSMALL) or standard parcel service (DPDSTD).
• If the freight payment method is collect, use ex-works tracking numbers for standard parcel
service (DPDSTD).
COD Tracking Numbers
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.16, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.16 
DPD COD System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ COD MAX
End of range
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ COD MIN
Start of range
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ COD LAST
Start of range
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
35
Note The first two digits of the tracking number range are reserved. The remaining six digits can
be used.
Tracking Numbers for Parcel-Letter
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.17, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.17 
DPD Parcel Letter System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ LTR MAX
End of range
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ LTR MIN
Start of range
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ LTR LAST
Start of range
Note The first two digits of the tracking number range are reserved. The remaining six digits can
be used.
Tracking Numbers for Miscellaneous
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.18, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.18 
DPD Prepaid System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ MISC MAX
End of range
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ MISC MIN
Start of range
SPS
DPD: [Internal ID] SEQ MISC LAST Start of range
Note The first two digits of the tracking number range are reserved. The remaining six digits can
be used.
DPD UK
DPD UK was formerly known as Parceline. DPD tracking numbers recycle from the minimum
tracking number in the range when the maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance
is needed.
Endicia (USPS)
Maintenance for Endicia is handled by the Endicia backend.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
36
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
FedEx (Express and Ground)
FedEx FXRS server software maintains these tracking numbers so no PRECISION maintenance is
necessary. You may need to make a request from the FedEx Download utility—available on the
FedEx server—to download a new tracking number range.
Geodis
Geodis tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
GLS
There are two GLS tracking number ranges: one for Standard services, and one for Time Definite
Delivery services. When the tracking number range expires, contact GLS to obtain a new tracking
number range, specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
• Standard Services or Time Definite Delivery Services
Configuring Tracking Number Range for GLS Standard Services
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.19, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group provides. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.19 
GLS Standard Services System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
GLS: [Internal ID] TRK NO STD MAX
End of range
SPS
GLS: [Internal ID] TRK NO STD MIN
Start of range
SPS
GLS: [Internal ID] TRK NO STD NEXT
Start of range
Note The maximum length of a GLS number is 12 digits. If you receive a 12-digit tracking
number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION calculates at the time of
shipping. If the range values are longer than 12 digits, contact the Precision Content Group.
Example If GLS provides a tracking range 42850202001 to 42850212000 for Internal ID A9905,
configure it as displayed in Table 4.20. If GLS provides a tracking range 428502020015 to
428502120009, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at the end.
Table 4.20 
GLS Standard Services System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
GLS: A9905 TRK NO STD MIN
42850202001
SPS
GLS: A9905 TRK NO STD NEXT
42850202001
SPS
GLS: A9905 TRK NO STD MAX
42850212000
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
37
Configuring Tracking Number Range for GLS Time Definite Delivery
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.21, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.21 
GLS Time Definite Delivery System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
GLS: [Internal ID] TRK NO TDD MAX
End of range
SPS
GLS: [Internal ID] TRK NO TDD MIN
Start of range
SPS
GLS: [Internal ID] TRK NO TDD NEXT
Start of range
Note The maximum length of a GLS number is 12 digits. If you receive a 12-digit number, drop
the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION calculates at the time of shipping. If
the range values are longer than 12 digits, contact the Precision Content Group.
Example If GLS provides a tracking range 42850202001 to 42850212000, for Internal ID
A9905, configure the system values as displayed in Table 4.22. If GLS provides a tracking range
428502020015 to 428502120009, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at
the end.
Table 4.22 
GLS Time Definite Delivery System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
GLS: A9905 TRK NO TDD MIN
42850202001
SPS
GLS: A9905 TRK NO TDD NEXT
42850202001
SPS
GLS: A9905 TRK NO TDD MAX
42850212000
Jetpak
Jetpak tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Kiala
Kiala tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Mory
Mory tracking numbers recycle from zero when the maximum tracking number is reached, so no
maintenance is needed.
Movianto
Movianto was formerly known as Healthcare Logistics (HCL). Movianto tracking numbers
recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the maximum tracking number is
reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
38
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
No Limit
No Limit tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Parcelforce
Parcelforce tracking numbers recycle from zero when the maximum tracking number—999999—
is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Purolator - Legacy
This section refers to the maintenance of tracking numbers of Purolator for US destinations. When
the tracking number range expires, contact Purolator to obtain a new tracking number range,
specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
• Sender ID, which is determined from the system value in Table 4.23, where [Internal ID] is the
unique identifier that the Precision Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your
[Internal ID] value, then contact the Precision Content Group.
Table 4.23 
Purolator Sender ID System Value
Category
Key
SPS
PURO: [Internal ID] SENDER ID
To contact Purolator:
• Email: [email protected]
• Phone: 1-800-326-4963 ext. 3458
Configuring Tracking Number Range for Purolator
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.24, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates.
Table 4.24 
Purolator System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
PURO: [Internal ID] TRK NO US MAX
End of range
SPS
PURO: [Internal ID] TRK NO US MIN
Start of range
SPS
PURO: [Internal ID] TRK NO US NEXT
Start of range
Note The maximum length of a Purolator US tracking number is 10 digits. If you receive a 10digit number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION calculates at the
time of shipping. If the tracking numbers you receive are longer than 10 digits, contact the
Precision Content Group.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
39
Example If Purolator provides a tracking range 567993609 to 568663819, for Internal ID A9905,
configure the system values as displayed in Table 4.25. If Purolator provides a tracking range
5679936094 to 5686638197, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at the
end.
Table 4.25 
Purolator System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
PURO: A9905 TRK NO US MIN
567993609
SPS
PURO: A9905 TRK NO US NEXT
567993609
SPS
PURO: A9905 TRK NO US MAX
568663819
Swedish Post
There are two tracking number ranges for Swedish Post: one for standard services and one for
UPU services. When the tracking number range expires, go to the following URL to request a new
tracking number range:
http://www.posten.se/i/foretag/ls/frakthandlingar/bestall_kollinummerserie.jspv
Fig. 4.4
Swedish Post Web Site
A translation of the fields in Figure 4.4 is as follows:
Company name. Enter your company name.
Organization number: Enter the VAT number of the Shipper company. This number is in the
format 99999-9999.
Contact person: Enter the name of the contact person.
Telephone number (Contact person): Enter the telephone number of the contact point.
E-mail address: Enter the email-address of the contact person.
Account number at Swedish Post: Enter your account number for tracking numbers.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
40
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Printing system: Enter the printing system that you use; in this case, Precision Software.
Number of parcel sent/year: Enter the number of parcels you send each year.
Service: Enter the service for which tracking numbers are required; for example, Express
Package [ExpressPaket] for UPU services, or Domestic packages (also PALL.ETT and cash
on delivery) [Inrikes Paket (aven PALL.ETT)] for all other services.
Configuring Tracking Number Range for Swedish Post Standard Services
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.26, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.26 
Swedish Post Standard System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
SWED: [Internal ID] TRK NO US MAX
End of range
SPS
SWED: [Internal ID] TRK NO MIN
Start of range
SPS
SWED: [Internal ID] TRK NO NEXT
Start of range
Note The maximum length of a Swedish Post standard tracking number is 10 digits. If you
receive an 11-digit number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION
calculates at the time of shipping. If the range values are longer than 10 or less than 9 digits,
contact the Precision Content Group. A country code of SE is automatically added at the end of the
tracking number by the rating program. If Swedish Post issue tracking ranges including SE at the
end, drop the SE.
Example If Swedish Post provides a tracking range 84929143601 to 84929243599 for Internal
ID A9905, configure the system values as displayed in Table 4.27, dropping the check digit.
Table 4.27 
Swedish Post Standard System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
SWED: A9905 SEQ MIN
8492914360
SPS
SWED: A9905 SEQ NEXT
8492914360
SPS
SWED: A9905 SEQ MAX
8492924359
Configuring Tracking Number Range for Swedish Post UPU Services
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
naming convention in Table 4.28, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.28 
Swedish Post UPU System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
SWED: [Internal ID] SEQ MAX UPU
End of range
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
SWED: [Internal ID] SEQ MIN UPU
Start of range
SPS
SWED: [Internal ID] SEQ NEXT UPU
Start of range
Category
41
Note The maximum length of a Swedish Post UPU tracking number is 8 digits. If you receive a
9-digit number, drop the last digit because it is a check digit, which PRECISION calculates at the
time of shipping. If the range values are longer than 8 digits, or less than 7 digits, contact the
Precision Content Group. If the range values include leading RO; for example, RO30367989,
ignore the leading RO. The tracking number becomes 30367989. A country code of SE is
automatically added at the end of the tracking number by the rating program. If Swedish Post issue
tracking ranges including SE at the end, drop the SE.
Example If Swedish Post provides a tracking range 25862403 to 25863402 for Internal ID
A9905, configure the system values as displayed in Table 4.29.
Table 4.29 
Swedish Post UPU System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
SWED: A9905 SEQ MIN UPU
25862403
SPS
SWED: A9905 SEQ NEXT UPU
25862403
SPS
SWED: A9905 SEQ MAX UPU
25863402
TNT France Domestic
TNT France Domestic was formerly known as Jet Services. TNT France Domestic tracking
numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the maximum tracking
number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
TNT (Express label and Unicom)
This section refers to the maintenance of TNT Tracking Numbers. There may be two tracking
ranges in place: one for Domestic (UK only) and one for International. When the tracking number
range expires, contact TNT to obtain a new tracking number range, specifying:
• Account number
• Company name and address
• Whether the tracking numbers required are for International or Domestic
Configuring Tracking Number Range for Domestic
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
following naming convention, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.30 
TNT UK Domestic System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
UTNT: [Internal ID] TRK NO DOM MAX
End of range
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
42
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check Digits
SPS
UTNT: [Internal ID] TRK NO DOM MIN
Start of range
SPS
UTNT: [Internal ID] TRK NO DOM NEXT
Start of range
Note The maximum length of a TNT tracking number for UK Domestic is 8 digits. If you receive
a 9-digit tracking number, drop the last digit, which is a check digit calculated by PRECISION at
the time of shipping. If the range values are longer than 9 digits, contact the Precision Content
Group.
Example If TNT provides a tracking range 56799360 to 56866381, for Internal ID A9905,
configure the range as displayed in Table 4.31. If TNT provides a tracking range 567993604 to
568663817, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at the end.
Table 4.31 
TNT UK Domestic System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
UTNT: A9905 TRK NO DOM MIN
56799360
SPS
UTNT: A9905 TRK NO DOM NEXT 56799360
SPS
UTNT: A9905 TRK NO DOM MAX
56866381
Configuring Tracking Number Range for International
Open option Y2 and find the current tracking number ranges configured. These ranges have the
following naming convention, where [Internal ID] is the unique identifier that the Precision
Content Group allocates. If you are unsure about your [Internal ID] value, contact the Precision
Content Group.
Table 4.32 
TNT International System Values
Category
Key
Tracking Numbers and Check
Digits
SPS
UTNT: [Internal ID] TRK NO INTL MAX
End of range
SPS
UTNT: [Internal ID] TRK NO INTL MIN
Start of range
SPS
UTNT: [Internal ID] TRK NO INTL NEXT
Start of range
Example If TNT provides a tracking range 56799360 to 56866381, for Internal ID A9905,
configure the tracking number range as displayed in Table 4.33. If TNT provides a tracking range
567993604 to 568663817, configure the range in the same way, omitting the check digit at the end.
Table 4.33 
TNT International System Values Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
UTNT: A9905 TRK NO INTL MIN
56799360
SPS
UTNT: A9905 TRK NO INTL NEXT
56799360
SPS
UTNT: A9905 TRK NO INTL MAX
56866381
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Carriers: Precision Network
43
UPS – Tracking Number Maintenance
UPS tracking numbers recycle from zero when the maximum tracking number is reached, so no
maintenance is needed. It is recommended to have one range for each shipper account to allow
ranges to last longer. Ensure that European ranges begin at 40000 and have a maximum value of
70999. The sequence part of tracking numbers is configured in PRECISION by Packing Location
or by carrier account number. A procedure in the XTUPSSHP.W looks for two system values:
• UPS: MAXIMUM SEQ NR to get the maximum number allowed
• UPS: [Internal ID] SEQ LAST to find the last sequence number used.
If UPS: [Internal ID] SEQ LAST contains no value, a new system value is created.
• Where wv-european-ups is true, the starting point is 4000000.
• If not, the starting point is set to the value in UPS: LAST USED SEQ NR.
• If that system value does not exist, the starting point is set to 1.
A full UPS tracking number contains [1Z + account number + service code + [sequence value in
UPS: [Internal ID] SEQ LAST} + check digit]
Trans-o-flex
Trans-o-flex tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
UPS SCS
UPS SCS was formerly known as Menlo and Emery. Maintenance for UPS SCS is handled by the
Gemini server software.
Yodel
Yodel tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Wim Bosman
Wim Bosman tracking numbers recycle from the minimum tracking number in the range when the
maximum tracking number is reached, so no maintenance is needed.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
44
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 5
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
This section describes how to configure TL/LTL carriers.
46
Describes the rating component of a TL/LTL service.
Overview
Creating Rate Structures Manually
46
Create Charge Tables manually.
53
Load rate structures into Charge Tables from Excel spreadsheets.
Loading Rating Structures from Excel
74
Associate a set of rates with a service.
Configuring a Service
46
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
A Charge Table contains charges such as freight rates, documentation charges, or insurance. These
charges are calculated during the shipping process using predefined calculation methods. The
Charge Table can be associated with a carrier service. Create rating structures using one of these
methods:
• Create Charge Tables manually in option TH.
• Upload rating structures into Charge Tables from Excel.
Creating Rate Structures Manually
Depending on the number and complexity of rate structures to configure, it is possible to set up
Charge Tables manually. You then associate these rate structures with carrier services.
Calculation Methods (TZ)
Calculation methods are preconfigured in PRECISION. Each calculation method has an associated
program. You must specify a calculation method when setting up a charge within a Charge Table.
To access this option, choose System Settings|TMS Master Data|Calculation Method or enter TZ
in the QuickPath.
Calculation method. This field contains the basis for the calculation method. See Table 5.1.
Description. This field contains the description for the calculation method.
Maintenance program. This field contains the preconfigured software program to execute for
the basis.
The six preconfigured calculation methods are displayed in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1 Preconfigured Calculation Methods
Basis
Charge
Description
00
Minimum charge
If the calculated charge amount for a particular charge code does not exceed
the minimum charge value, the minimum charge for this charge code is
applied.
01
Fixed charge
A fixed amount is charged.
02
Rate per
Calculate the charge based on a rate per chosen unit such as gross weight,
volume, or inners.
03
Percentage of value
Calculate the charge based on a percentage of a value such as shipping value
or FOB value.
04
Tiered user defined table Calculate the charge based on a tiered user defined axis. For more details,
see“Axis Definitions (ZX)”.
99
Maximum charge
If the calculated charge amount exceeds the maximum charge value, the
maximum charge is applied.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
47
Axis Definitions (ZX)
When creating a tiered user-defined Charge Table, establish an X axis and, where necessary, a Y
axis. Set up each axis type with individual breaks for each axis. For more details, see “Creating a
Charge Table (TH)” on page 49. To access this option, choose System Settings|TMS Master Data|
Axis Definitions or enter ZX in the QuickPath.
Axis. Enter X or Y.
Axis type. Enter the axis type used to identify the specific axis.
Description. Enter a description of the axis, usually indicating the basis of the axis such as
gross weight or freight class.
Basis. Select a basis for the axis calculation. For example, an axis such as Weight can be based
on the Net Weight on the shipment, or an axis such as Pack Types can be based on the number
of inners on the shipment.
Possible basis values are:
01 = Gross Weight
02 = Net Weight
03 = Net Net Weight
04 = Volume
05 = Ship Quantity
06 = Inners
07 = Outers
08 = Packs
09 = Distance (crow-fly)
10 = Distance (roundtrip)
11 = Zone[s]
12 = Freight Class(es)
13 = Simple Tier [no Y axis]
14 = Number of assets
15 = Distance band
16 = Loadspace
Unit of Measure. Enter the unit of measure for the selected basis.
For example, an X axis of Weight and a Y axis of Freight Class means that the charge calculation
is based on these parameters. If using the axis method, the user must always have an X axis, but
not necessarily a Y axis.
The Break sub-option enables you to maintain breaks within an axis. A break is an explicit value,
which is used to indicate values that apply up to a particular point.
If the first break on an axis has a value of 1500, this value represents the range 0-1500. If the next
break value is 2000, this value represents the range >1500-2000. Set the last break of an axis to a
maximum allowable value such as 99999999999.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
48
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Client, Axis, Axis type. These fields are read-only.
Break. Enter a user-defined code for this break.
Up to. Enter an explicit value used to indicate the upper limit of the axis break. Zone, Freight
Class, and Distance Band bases do not use the Up to field.
From zone. Enter the From zone for basis type 11 only.
To zone. Enter the To zone for basis type 11 only.
From freight class. Enter the From freight class for basis type 12 only.
To freight class. Enter the To freight class for basis type 12 only.
Unit type. Enter the Pack Type for basis types 06-08.
Distance Band. The Distance Band for basis type 15 only.
Fig. 5.1
Breaks Example: Weights
Fig. 5.2
Breaks Example: Freight Class
Region Zones (RG)
Important parts of a rate structure include the ship-from and ship-to Region Zones and Zone
Classifications. A Region Zone allows for grouping of individual, or ranges of, postal or zip codes
into one Region Zone record. To access this option, choose System Settings|TMS Master Data|
Zones or enter RG in the QuickPath.
Zone. Enter the code for the zone.
Description. Enter a meaningful description for the zone.
State/Country/Market. Available for future use.
You can then set up one or more Postal/Zip Codes against the Region Zone by completing the
following sub-option fields:
From Postal Code. Enter the From Postal/Zip code for the Region Zone.
To Postal Code. Enter the To Postal/Zip code for the Region Zone.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
49
In Use. Select this field to activate this Postal/Zip code range and make it available for rate
structure calculations.
Address Book. Reserved for use by PRECISION network carriers.
Partner. Reserved for use by PRECISION network carriers.
Zone Classifications (ZC)
Zone Classifications Maintenance allows you to set up From/To zone relationships, where each
relationship may then be associated with rates within a rating structure. To access this option,
choose System Settings|TMS Master Data|Zone Classifications or enter ZC in the QuickPath.
Zone classification. Enter the code of the zone class.
From zone. Enter the origin zone for this zone class; for example, CTRY-US.
To zone. Enter the destination zone for this zone class; for example, CTRY-US-STATE:IL.
Description. Enter a meaningful zone classification description.
In Use. Select this field to activate this Zone Classification.
Rate Codes. Reserved for use by Precision’s network carriers.
Creating a Charge Table (TH)
A rate structure, as defined using option TH, is the composition of rate calculation types that make
up the required set of charges. One or many charges, of any of the predefined calculation methods,
can be included in a rating structure. To access this option, choose System Settings|TMS Master
Data|Charge Tables or enter TH in the QuickPath.
Charge Table. Enter a code of up to 10 characters.
Start date. Enter the date when the Charge Table becomes effective. You can optionally add an
end date.
Description. Enter a Charge Table description.
Summarize totals by charge. Select this field to summarize charges by charge/revenue code. If
multiple rate structure calculation types exist for the same charge/revenue code, then these can
be summarized to output a single Shipment Charge line.
Calculate shipment charges per. The purpose of this set is to determine the level at which to
apply the charge criteria. For example, if the rate structure has charges based on Weight and
Freight Classes, and shipment transactions include differing freight classes on different item
lines, it may be appropriate to choose to calculate charges per Line to select weight from
shipment item lines.
Note The Stop choice is not available.
Calculate group charges per. Select the level at which to apply the charge criteria when the
rate structure is applied to a Group/Load.
Note The Stop choice is not available.
Process Level. Available for future use.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
50
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Allow Freight Shopping/Service Days/Carrier Route/Carrier/Transport mode. These fields are
obsolete.
Zone determination type. Possible values for this field are:
• D2D (Deliver to Destination) uses the From City and To City values. If the field is blank,
this value is the default.
• D2P (Deliver to Port) uses the From City and To Port.
• P2D (Port to Delivery) uses the From Port and To City.
• P2P (Port to Port) uses the From Port and To Port.
Charge Details
The Charge details - rate without zones sub-option enables you to create and add charge types to
the Charge Table.
Process Sequence. Enter a unique sequence number for the charge detail line; for example,
05, 10, 15. The sequence number determines the order in which the calculation program
processes the charges.
Charge Code. Select a charge code for this charge.
Calculation method. Select one of the six predefined calculation methods from Table 5.1.
Complete the subsequent fields based on the calculation method you select here.
Description. The default description associated with the charge code in option CH is used.
However, you can override the description.
Currency. Select the currency in which this charge code is to be calculated.
Tax type. If a tax is to be calculated on the charge, select the tax group code.
Allow zero validations. If a zero charge is allowed, select this field.
From process sequence. This field indicates the process number from which this charge
method is to apply.
To process sequence. This field indicates the process number to which this charge method is
to apply.
Rate per unit. If you selected method 02 in the Calculation Method field, enter the rate per unit
to be used for the charge calculation.
Selling Rate per unit. If you selected method 02 in the Calculation Method field, enter the
selling rate per unit to be used for the charge calculation.
Minimum Charge. If you selected method 00 in the Calculation Method field, enter the
Minimum Charge amount to be used for the charge calculation. If the calculated charge
amount does not exceed this minimum charge value, the minimum charge is taken. This sets a
minimum value for a particular charge code of the charge table. Therefore, if the calculation
made by the other lines for that charge code does not reach this prescribed value, the value for
that charge code is the minimum value.
Note This functionality is available in the Windows UI. It is under construction in the Web
UI.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
51
Selling Minimum Charge. If you selected method 00 in the Calculation Method field, enter the
Selling Minimum Charge to be used for the charge calculation.
Note This functionality is available in the Windows UI. It is under construction in the Web
UI.
Maximum Charge. If you selected method 99 in the Calculation Method field, enter the
Maximum Charge amount to be used for the charge calculation. If the calculated charge
amount does exceed the maximum charge value, the maximum charge is taken. This sets a
maximum value for a particular charge code of the charge table. Therefore, if the calculation
made by the other lines for that charge code does not exceed this prescribed value, the value
for that charge code will be the maximum value.
Note This functionality is available in the Windows UI. It is under construction in the Web
UI.
Selling Maximum Charge. If you selected method 99 in the Calculation Method field, enter the
Selling Maximum Charge to be used for the charge calculation.
Note This functionality is available in the Windows UI. It is under construction in the Web
UI.
Fixed Charge. If you selected method 01 in the Calculation Method field, enter the Fixed
amount to be used for the charge calculation.
Note This functionality is available in the Windows UI. It is under construction in the Web
UI.
Selling Fixed Charge. If you selected method 01 in the Calculation Method field, enter the
selling fixed amount to be used for the charge calculation.
Note This functionality is available in the Windows UI. It is under construction in the Web
UI.
Unit of measure. If you selected method 02 or 04 in the Calculation Method field, specify the
UOM the charges are based on.
Unit type. If you selected method 02 in the Calculation Method field, enter the container or
pack type code in this field.
% rate. If you selected method 03 in the Calculation Method field, enter the percentage rate to
be used for the charge calculation.
Selling% rate. If you selected method 03 in the Calculation Method field, enter the selling
percentage rate to be used for the charge calculation.
% basis. If you selected method 03 in the Calculation Method field, select the appropriate
value on which the percentage is to be calculated.
% Charge Code. If you selected method 03 in the Calculation Method field and the percentage
is to be based on a charge code amount, select a charge code. For example, you can specify
insurance as a percentage of the freight amount only, rather than as a percentage of shipment
value or shipment value + freight. In this case, select Charge Code as the % basis and specify
the freight cost code as the % Charge Code.
Tiered rate scale [1:n]. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field, this field
indicates that all rates entered by the user in the X/Y axis are in this unit; for example, an entry
of 1000 indicates that the rate is per 1000.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
52
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Check next tier. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field and you select this
field, PRECISION checks the next tier on the Charge Table. This check can reduce a charge
when you are shipping a quantity that is very near to the break. For example, you have a
950 kg shipment, and the rates are as follows:
• 1st tier - rate of $0.48 up to 1000 kg
• 2nd tier - rate of $0.43 up to 1500 kg
Using the first tier price, the total cost is 950 x $0.48 = $456. Using the next tier, the total cost
is 1001 x $0.43 = $430.43.
Unit to round towards. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field, use this field
to specify the UOM rounding unit. For example, a road carrier deals in quantities that round to
full units and a postal carrier rounds to intervals of 0.5 kg. If a round unit is not specified,
PRECISION uses the actual weight or volume, rather than the rounded up value. For example,
178.89 kg without rounding uses the value 178.89 as the rate per kg, whereas the same value
using a rounding of “1” calculates the figure using 179 as the rate per kg.
Volume to weight conversion. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field, use
this field to specify the factor for converting the volume to a weight equivalent.
Weight Volume Divide. This field determines whether the value entered for the volume/weight
conversion is to be used for division or multiplication. If this field is selected, the volume is
divided by the conversion rate to give the weight equivalent.
Test volume v weight. Select this field to test volume against weight on the Charge Table.
PRECISION selects the highest/largest weight to calculate the freight rate, based on the
conversion that has taken place.
X axis. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field, this field contains the user-
defined X axis as described in Axis Definitions.
Y axis. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field, this field contains the user-
defined Y axis as described in Axis Definitions.
Use zone classifications. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field and you
want to create a three-dimensional Charge Table, select this field. The third axis is then based
on zones.
Use header quantity. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field and charge
calculations are to be based on the shipment header quantity rather than at item line level,
select this field.
Load Space to weight conversion. If you selected method 04 in the Calculation Method field,
use this field to specify the factor for converting the Load Space to a weight equivalent.
Load Space to weight uom. This field determines the weight UOM represented by the
conversion factor from loadspace to weight.
Weight Load Space Divide. This field determines whether the value entered for the
loadspace/weight conversion is to be used for division or multiplication. If this field is
selected, the loadspace is divided by the conversion rate to give the weight equivalent.
Test Load Space v weight. Select this field to test loadspace against weight on the Charge
Table. PRECISION selects the highest/largest weight to calculate the freight rate, based on the
conversion that has taken place.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
53
The Charge Details - Rates Without Zones sub-option also has two sub-options, as displayed in
Figure 5.3.
Fig. 5.3
Charge Details - Rates Without Zones Sub-options
Charge Table - Zone Classification
This sub-option enables you to specify a zone class for the Charge Table. The editable fields are:
Zone Class. Enter the zone class for which the rates apply.
Minimum Charge. Enter the minimum charge for this zone classification.
In Use. To enable the zone classification, select this field.
Charge Table Detail Exceptions
This sub-option enables you to control whether other cost types are calculated when another
particular cost type is calculated. For example, do not create this type of cost line when the other
cost type exists. You can also use this record as a prerequisite. For example, only create this cost
line when the other cost type has a value. The editable fields are:
Reason. Use this free-text field to describe the purpose of the record created. The prerequisite
condition only kicks in when Reason is set to a value of PREREQUISITE.
In Use. To enable the detail exception, select this field.
Loading Rating Structures from Excel
Many carriers supply their rates in Excel format. Some of these rate structures contain complicated
zone-based or weight/tier-based charge calculations. You can upload these rate structures directly
from Excel when they are in the correct format.
You can upload Excel files in two formats:
• Tier-based
• Flat structure
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
54
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Uploading Tier-Based Excel Files
The tier-based file format is displayed in Figure 5.4. See Topic 039 - Tier Based - Upload
Format.xls on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|PRECISION
Reference Guides|Appendices for a copy of this file.
Fig. 5.4
Tier Based Excel File
In the spreadsheet template, fields containing text in black font represent predefined data that must
be present for the data in red font to be interpreted correctly. Data in red font may be replaced with
actual content/rates/codes.
The spreadsheet is divided into discrete sections, each of which has a prescribed purpose for
reading the information into the database. The first column is reserved for the section names.
TABLESECTION
The TABLESECTION contains the Charge Table header information to be uploaded into
PRECISION. This has the following components:
TABLE. The Charge Table code to be used in PRECISION. The code must not be longer than
10 characters.
DESCRIPTION. The name/description of the Charge Table. If this field is blank, you receive a
warning message during the upload and the table description defaults to New Charge Table.
DATE. The date from which the rates in the spreadsheet apply.
CURRENCY. The currency of the rates in the spreadsheet.
BUYSELLDEFAULT. If there is a buy rate but no sell rate anywhere in the spreadsheet, the sell
rate defaults from the buy rate. The same applies if there is a sell rate and no buy rate, and
applies to Fixed Amounts also. This field can have a value of YES or NO.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
55
COSTTYPE. The cost type for the axis rates in the spreadsheet. If this column heading does
not exist, a default cost code of QFRT is assigned during upload. The cost type code in this
field must exist in CH or the upload fails.
SUMMARISE. This YES or NO value field indicates whether the cost types of the same cost
type code are summarized into one freight line after the calculation. For example, there is a
calculation for a cost type FRT for one calculation method and a calculation for cost type FRT
for another calculation method. If both calculations occur on the same Charge Table, they are
summarized on a single Shipment cost line when this field is set to YES.
USENEXTTIER. This YES or NO value field indicates whether the next tier of the axis is to be
checked for a cheaper rate. If this field is set to YES, the rate of the next tier is multiplied by
the maximum weight of the previous tier, because that is the minimum point for the next tier
up.
USEHEADERQTY. This YES or NO value field determines whether the header quantity is
used to determine the rate break on the axis. Sometimes, the overall quantity of the shipment
must be taken to determine the rate break. Then you multiply the quantity of the rate-criteria
by this rate break rate. For example, when the rating is per weight, use the total shipment
weight to determine the weight break. Then multiply the rate by the weight of the individual
packages.
VOLUMETRIC. If volumetric weight must be checked against actual weight, this field contains
the conversion rate; for example, Volume Ratio 1m3 = 200 kg. The volumetric weight is
compared with the actual gross weight and the higher of the two is used to determine the rate
break.
VOLUMETRICDIVIDE. This Y or N value field determines whether the volumetric weight
specified is switched on by selecting the Weight Volume Divide field in Charge Table details.
The default action is to multiply but when the value of this field is Y, the Divide flag is set.
LOADSPACECONVERSION. If loadspace weight must be checked against actual weight, this
field contains the conversion rate; for example, Loadspace Ratio 1 Load Meter = 200 kg.
Loadspace weight is compared with actual gross weight and the higher of the two is used to
determine the rate break. If both VOLUMETRIC and LOADSPACECONVERSION are
completed, then volumetric weight is compared with loadspace weight and actual gross weight
and the highest of the three is used to determine the rate break.
LOADSPACEDIVIDE. This Y or N value field determines whether the loadspace weight
specified is switched on by selecting the Weight Loadspace Divide field in Charge Table
details. The default action is to multiply but when the value of this field is Y, the Divide flag is
set.
PACKMINTYPES. This allows for the specification of a comma-separated list of packing types
that exist in option PY. A minimum weight can be set against these types. The pack types then
apply the minimum weight at the time of rating. The minimum weight of a package type is
compared against the weight of the package. If the minimum weight is higher than the actual
package weight, the minimum weight value is used as the rating weight for the package.
PACKMINWEIGHT. This field contains the minimum rating weight associated with a package
for the pack types specified in PACKMINTYPES.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
56
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
RATEPERUNIT . This field contains the rounded-up-to value for weights when they are being
checked for freight costs. For example, if this field contains 0.5, all weights are rounded to the
nearest 0.5 value before multiplying them by the rate for that weight break. Therefore, 22.2 lb
is rounded to 22.5 lb before being applied to the relevant rate for the weight break.
ROUNDWGTTO. This is another name for RATEPERUNIT.
ZONETYPE. If City is used to determine the zone, this field specifies the city field to use in
the rating per zone. There are four possible values:
• DOOR-TO-DOOR: The origin and destination zone cities are taken from the From/To
partners. If no ZONETYPE is specified, DOOR-TO-DOOR is used by default.
• DOOR-TO-PORT: The origin zone city is taken from the From Partner and the destination
zone city is taken from the Port of destination (XMSHDR0.SHPDES).
• PORT-TO-DOOR: The origin zone city is taken from the Port of Loading
(XMSHDR0.SHPLOD) and the destination zone city is taken from the To Partner.
• PORT-TO-PORT: The origin zone city is taken from the Port of Loading
(XMSHDR0.SHPLOD) and the destination zone city is taken from the Port of destination
(XMSHDR0.SHPDES).
ZONEPREFIX. This prefix precedes all Region zones and Zone classifications created for this
Charge Table. An upload creates new Region Zones (RG records) automatically when postal
codes are used in the upload. However, country, place, and state zones do not result in new
Region Zones being created as these would be common in their meaning in PRECISION.
A ZONEPREFIX hint system value is automatically created as a result of the Excel upload. To
speed up the search for the region records during the rating process, you can also manually add
another hint to the database for the Origin zone. These system values are displayed in
Table 5.2. The zone prefix must be unique for each Charge Table Excel file. Otherwise, you
may receive an error message in the rating process due to a zone classification conflict.
ZONEFROM. This field specifies the origin zone used to determine the zone classifications for
this Charge Table. This field is important for working out the From/To combination that gives
the zone classification used during rating. The From zone must already exist in PRECISION.
Use the following naming formats:
• CTRY-[ISO country code]
• CTRY-[ISO country code]-[City name]
If the ZONEFROM includes a place name:
• The place name is to be no longer than 10 characters.
• Ensure the full name—for example, CTRY-BE-ANTWERP—fits in column H of the
spreadsheet. If not, increase the width of the column. PRECISION does not accept
wrapped values.
Zones Example
The Excel file in Figure 5.5 contains rates for two zones in Austria. The ISO country code for
Austria is AT.
• Zone AT01 for Vienna
• Zone AT02 for the rest of Austria
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
57
Fig. 5.5
Austria Zone Rates
Fig. 5.6
Austria Zone Classifications
To upload this file, open option TH and click the Upload File button. Upload the file as displayed
in Figure 5.6. When the file uploads, ZONE CLASSIFICATIONS are automatically created in
option ZC, based on the information coming from the spreadsheet. No zone records (RG) are
created because there were no Postal/Zip codes in the ZONESECTION. But the zone class records
in option ZC reference these zones—these are like default zones in the system.
Fig. 5.7
Austria Zone Classifications
When you upload the Excel file, the system value ZONE PREFIX HINT is also automatically
created. However, you must create the system value ZONEFROM:[Charge Table]:[consignor
partner] manually, including the correct Charge Table and the consignor partner code. Figure 5.8
displays the two system values needed for the Austrian uploaded rates.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
58
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 5.8
Austria Zone System Values
Table 5.2 displays the automatically created ZONE PREFIX HINT system value and the ZONE
FROM system value, which you create manually.
Table 5.2 
ZONEPREFIX Hint System Value
Category
Key
Value
Explanation
COST +
REV
ZONE PREFIX HINT
– [Charge Table]
[the value of the
ZONEPREFIX]
for example:
for example:
ZONE PREFIX HINT
– CTABLE1
PRFX
This system value hints the prefix of the region name
and speeds up the rating process. This value is
automatically created as a result of the upload
program.
ZONEFROM:[Charge
Table]:[consignor]
[the origin region] This system value enables the engine to bypass
identifying the origin region, and begin determining
for example:
the destination region.
CTRY-GB
It is qualified by the consignor, as the same Charge
Table can be used for more than one consignor, with
similar zone class setup for multiple origins. If the
consignor is not specified, the same Charge Table
hint can apply over all consignors without a specific
hint for the specified Charge Table.
COST +
REV
for example:
ZONEFROM:
CTABLE1:CONO1
In the example, the rating engine is to find
destination zones that begin PRFX when processing
the Charge Table CTABLE1. The engine does not
have to check the defaults for CTRY or other postal
code range regions with the same postal code names.
In the example, the system value indicates to the
rating engine that when processing the Charge Table
CTABLE1 for consignor CONO1, the origin region
is always CTRY-GB.
CLASSSECTION
This section defines the zone classes to use in the Charge Table. The rates for the Charge Table are
then grouped under these zone classes. The definition has the following components:
WEIGHTUOM. Specifies the unit of measure to use in the weight breaks that follow.
VOLUMEUOM. Specifies the unit of measure to use in the volume breaks that follow. You can
specify that an axis is based on weight or volume. The axis names are generated by the system
and are limited to two characters. The upload program can handle a number of axes. Weight
UOM or Volume UOM is used in the same spreadsheet cell. If rating for pack type breaks,
leave the heading WEIGHTUOM in the Excel cell and leave the value field blank.
LOADSPACEUOM. Specifies the unit of measure to use in the loadspace breaks that follow.
ZONE. Specifies the zone classification according to the carrier definition for the rates
breakdown. There can be one zone specification for each zone classification.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
59
RATESSECTION
This section defines the rates to use for this Charge Table, where the rates are associated with
particular zone classes.
You can have several rates sections, depending on how you format rates for upload. For example,
your buy rates to customers might be different that your sell rates from carriers. It is sometimes
easier to format rates downward in the spreadsheet, which makes them easy to connect to the zone
classes. The RATESSECTION is directly related to the CLASSSECTION above it, in terms of
determining to which zone class the rates apply. RATESSECTION has the following components:
WEIGHTS, VOLUMES, LOADSPACE, PACKS. This column cell title can have one of these
values, and this column holds the up-to break limits for the rates section.
PACKTYPE. This column holds the pack types for the breaks for the rates section. It is used in
conjunction with the PACKS column.
FREIGHTCLASS. If it applies, this column holds the associated freight class for the rates
section. The freight class is taken from the item lines. It is assumed that mixed classes should
not be in packages.
BUYFIXED. This column holds fixed fees that the shipper can charge to the customer.
BUYRATE. This column holds a rate per weight/volume/loadspace/packtype that the shipper
can charge to the customer.
SELLFIXED. This column holds fixed fees that the carrier charges the shipper.
SELLRATE. This column holds a rate per weight/volume/loadspace/packtype that the carrier
charges the shipper.
BUYMINIMUM. This column stores the minimum rate applicable for this zone class that can be
charged to the customer.
SELLMINIMUM. This column is not available.
ZONESSECTION
This section defines the zones as specified in the CLASSSECTION. The PRECISION rating
engine uses this information to find the relevant zone class for this Charge Table when the user is
rating a shipment.
ZONE. The zone class in PRECISION. The same zone can occur multiple times because it can
cover more than one origin/destination combination.
Example UK to Paris and UK to Roissy are zone class 1. UK to Nice and UK to Marseilles
are zone class 2.
ISOCOUNTRY. The ISOCOUNTRY column is mandatory. If you only use the country to
identify the destination region, you can enter a comma-separated list of countries. The same
zone class applies to all these countries.
STATE. The state code of the destination region is optional. If you include the State column,
you can only enter one country in the ISOCOUNTRY column.
CITYNAME. If you are specifying a city as the zone, enter the city name here.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
60
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
FROMPOSTCODE. The From Post Code contains the starting postal code of a range postal
codes. If you have several ranges of postal codes for the same zone class, you can enter a
comma-separated list of postal code starting characters. If you use a comma-separated list, you
cannot use the TOPOSTCODE for the same zone class definition line.
TOPOSTCODE. Specifies the end postal code for the postal code range definition.
TERMS. Specifies the delivery terms for this zone.
Postal Code Scenarios
Table 5.3 
Postal Code Range Scenarios
Scenario
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zone Classification Conflict
Two postal code ranges
Same zone prefix
Same zone
Each in its own Excel Charge Table
No
Two postal code ranges
Same zone prefix
Different zones
Each in its own Excel Charge Table
Yes
Two postal code ranges
Different zone prefix
Different zones
Each in its own Excel Charge Table
No
Two postal code ranges
Different zone prefix
Same zone
Each in its own Excel Charge Table
No
Example If there is a 90210 postal code in US and a 90210 postal code in Germany, the
Postal Code Master Table contains only one postal code record.
However, do not integrate a country prefix into the postal codes such as US90210 and
DE90210 to make the codes unique, because:
• The prefix is also printed on any customs documents.
• TMS processing requires postal codes to be in their actual format.
No action is required because PRECISION can determine the applicable zones using the
RXTYPE field in Region/Postal code association. Only zones in the relevant country are
considered and the duplicate code is ignored.
Reserved Region/Zone Names For Charge Calculations
Table 5.4 lists the naming conventions of Region zones that use the charge calculations but do not
require the creation of an RG record.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
61
Table 5.4 
Zone Naming Conventions
Zone Naming Conventions Example
Explanation
CTRY-[ISO Country Code]
CTRY-IE
The example represents a region of Ireland. The
country region is always be the same, irrespective of
the Charge Table used. Ireland region always
represents the whole of Ireland.
CTRY-[ISO country code]STATE:[state code]
CTRY-US-STATE:KS
The example represents the two-character code for
the state of Kansas in the US
CTRY-[ISO country code][place name]
CTRY-AU-KINGSTON is
Kingston in Australia
In this example, [place name] is Kingston. The place
name can contain up to 10 characters and must be in
the PRECISION city list. Used with the country
code, [placename] uniquely identifies a place.
CTRY-JM-KINGSTON is
Kingston in Jamaica
CTRY-[ISO country code]999999999
CTRY-FR-999999999
The 999999999 represents the remainder of a
country, in this case France. This convention is used
when a carrier sends rates for different destinations in
a country and includes a rest of the country rate for
all unspecified destinations. The 999999999 is an
exception zone to catch the unspecified destinations.
An attempt is made to find a zone classification using
this region when no zone class is found using a more
qualified region.
For example, a carrier specifies one zone class for
destination of Paris, and the rest of France uses a
different zone class, resulting in two destination
regions:
• CTRY-FR-PARIS
• CTRY-FR-999999999
CTRY-[ISO country code]STATE:999999999
CTRY-USSTATE:999999999
The 999999999 represents the remaining states of a
country, in this case the US. This convention is used
when a carrier sends rates for different states in a
country and includes a rest of states rate for all
unspecified states. The 999999999 is an exception
zone to catch the unspecified destinations. An
attempt is made to find a zone classification using
this region when no zone class is found using a more
qualified region.
For example, the destination state is KS and the
following zone classes are set up:
• CTRY-US-STATE:MD
• CTRY-US-STATE:IL
• CTRY-US-STATE:999999999
KS is in the 99999999 zone for all remaining states.
RESTOFTHEWORLD
This zone classification works on a similar basis to
CTRY-[ISO country code]-999999999. If a carrier
specifies destination countries for determining zones,
these are used first. RESTOFTHEWORLD
represents any countries not listed, and their zone
classification is determined by this default region.
Additional Sections for Accessorials
Use additional sections to configure accessorials or charges.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
62
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
FIXEDCHARGE
This section can appear multiple times within a spreadsheet. Use it to load a detail line for fixed
cost charges. This action creates a charge detail line of calculation type 01.
COSTTYPE=xxxx. The option CH cost type to associate with the cost line.
BUYVALUE=xxxx. The fixed value to charge to the customer.
SELLVALUE=xxxx. The fixed value the carrier charges the shipper.
RATEPERCHARGE
This section can appear multiple times within the spreadsheet. Use it to load a detail line for a rateper charge such as the rate per weight or number of packs. This action creates a charge detail line
of calculation type 02.
COSTTYPE=xxxx. The CH cost type to associate with the cost line.
COSTDESC=xxxx. The description associated with the cost line.
BUYVALUE=xxxx. The rate to charge the customer. The rate is applied on a chosen basis.
SELLVALUE=xxxx. The rate the carrier charges the shipper. The rate is applied on a chosen
basis.
PERUNIT=xxxx. The basis for the rate on this charge detail line. Table 5.5 lists the possible
values.
Table 5.5 
Possible Unit Values
Unit Code
Unit
GWT
Gross weight
NWT
Net weight
NNWT
Net net weight
CHGWT
Chargeable weight
VOL
Volume
LOADSP
Loadspace
SHQTY
Ship Quantity
INNER
Inners
OUTER
Outers
PACK
Pack
CONT
Container
DELS
Deliveries
COLLS
Collections
STOP
Stops
CROW
Crowfly
RTOUR
Round tour
PCKFCT
Pack-factor/Colli-factor
PCKCUT
Pack cut-off factor
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
63
PERUOM=xxxx. The basis UOM for the rate on this charge detail line. Values are qualified
based on the PERUNIT field. For example, a mass unit of measure such as Kg or lb is allowed
for GWT, NWT, NNWT, CHGWT.
VOLUMETRIC=xxxx. The volumetric conversion rate; for example, 1m3 = 200 KgS.
VOLUMETRICDIVIDE=x. Set this field to Y to switch on the volumetric divide flag. The
default is to multiply.
SCALE=xxxx. Set the scale factor to be held for the rate when the rate applicable is for X units
rather than for a single unit. For example, the rate may be per 100 Kgs.
PERCENTCHARGE
This section can appear multiple times within the spreadsheet. Use it to load a detail line for a
percentage charge such as the percentage of the shipment cost. This action creates a charge detail
line of calculation type 03.
COSTTYPE=xxxx. The CH cost type to associate with the cost line.
BUYVALUE=xxxx. The percentage to charge the customer. The percentage is applied on a
chosen basis.
SELLVALUE=xxxx. The percentage the carrier charges the shipper. The percentage is applied
on a chosen basis.
PERUNIT=xxxx. The basis for the rate on this charge detail line. Table 5.5 lists the possible
values.
Table 5.6 
Possible Unit Values
Unit Code
Unit
SHIP
Shipment value
STAT
Statistical value
COST
Shipment cost
LIST
Shipment list price
INSUR
Shipment insured value
CHARGE
Percentage of another cost type
PERCOSTTYPE=xxxx. If PERUNIT=CHARGE, this field contains the cost type to which this
percentage applies. For example, use this field where insurance is charged as a percentage of
freight.
MINIMUMCHARGE
This section can appear multiple times within the spreadsheet. Use it to load a detail line for
minimum cost charge. This action creates a charge detail line of calculation type 00. The fields are
the same as those used for FIXEDCHARGE. A minimum charge is applied against a charge of the
same cost type within the same Charge Table.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
64
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
MAXIMUMCHARGE
Use this section to load a detail line for maximum cost charge. This action creates a charge detail
line of calculation type 99. The fields are the same as those used for FIXEDCHARGE. A
maximum charge is applied against a charge of the same cost type within the same Charge Table.
Uploading
Do not have more than 10 blank lines between the different sections in the spreadsheet. Blank lines
are used to determine whether there are any further lines to read from the spreadsheet.
If you have a dedicated PRECISION server with no Microsoft Office applications, install Excel on
the server running the PRECISION application.
Uploading a Tiered Format File
In this example, you upload a Charge Table named FM3. The rates are for domestic shipping to
different zones in Germany. The rate charged is based on the shipment weight and the zone. In the
file each zone represents a city.
Note This file is available for download as part of the Appendices folder on the QAD Document
Library under Transportation Management|PRECISION Reference Guides|Appendices. Other
sample files are also available in the Appendices.
1
Format the information so it is accepted by the PRECISION Charge Table upload utility, as
displayed in Figure 5.9. In the example, the file is already formatted correctly.
Fig. 5.9
Formatted Excel File
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
2
Save the file to a directory and open PRECISION Windows UI.
3
To open the Charge Table screen, type TH in the fast-path and press Enter.
4
To upload from a file, click the Upload button. The upload screen is displayed, as in
Figure 5.11.
65
Fig. 5.10
Charge Table Upload Button
Fig. 5.11
Charge Table Upload Screen
5
Select the Tier based format option and choose the Excel file you saved for upload.
6
To begin the upload, click the green check mark (F2). When the upload has finished, a
message is displayed that Charge Table FM3 has been successfully loaded. Return to the TH
Charge Table list.
Note The cost codes in the Excel spreadsheet must already exist in the database. For example, if
you use the code FRT for freight, code FRT must already exist in the CH table.
Verify and Review Data After Upload
1
Select the newly uploaded Charge Table and click the Update Entry button (F7).
2
To open the Charge Table details, click the Sub options button (F11).
3
Select the charge line and click the Update Entry button (F7). THTD02 contains the charge
details, as displayed in Figure 5.12.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
66
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 5.12
Charge Details
Note X and Y axis definitions are attached automatically in the Axis definitions table. The X
axis has a new record created each time a new or existing Charge Table is loaded. The X axis
created is two characters in length and alphanumeric. The first table loaded is assigned the
identifier 9Z. The next table loaded is 9Y and so on until it reaches 9A. The next table loaded
is then 8Z. The Y axis defaults to NA.
4
Next, view the zone classifications records created automatically by your Excel upload. In the
fast-path, type ZC and press Enter. Find the records beginning relating to FMDE.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
67
Fig. 5.13
Zone Classification Records
5
To view any postal code information created automatically by your Excel upload, in the fastpath type RG and press Enter. To view the postal code range behind a zone, select a record and
double-click it.
Note In this example, the file contains only City code for Zones. Therefore, no RG records
are created.
6
Next, create a system value that you need. Open option Y2 and specify the COST + REV
category. The upload has already created the ZONE PREFIX HINT value. Create the
corresponding ZONE FROM system value with a value that matches the ZONE FROM in the
Excel table, as displayed in Figure 5.14.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
68
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 5.14
System Value
7
Return to the TH option and open your Charge Table by double-clicking it. Double-click the
FRT charge.
Fig. 5.15
Charge Table Sub Options
8
Double-click Charge Table - zone classification. Figure 5.16 displays the minimum values for
each zone classification, uploaded from the Excel file. In this case, there are no minimum
charges so the value is zero. If values are supplied, each value is used as a shipment charge in
its zone when the calculated charge is less than the minimum.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
69
Fig. 5.16
Minimum Charge Values
9
To view the values for the different weight breaks loaded from Excel, click the Zone Rates
button. Select Toggle Axes and Fixed Values to get a full view.
Fig. 5.17
Zone Classification Rates
Flat Structure File Format
The flat file structure is an alternative spreadsheet format. It is typically used for lane-based freight
and accessorial charges. The flat-file structure allows for multiple origin countries in one Charge
Table. You can also allow for multiple currencies in one Charge Table because different shipper
countries may have rates in different currencies.
The flat-file structure allows you to effectively define cumulative charges based on different
aspects of the shipment. Each charge section can be zone-based, which means there may be
different surcharges based on the different origin/destination combinations. Therefore, the Charge
Table contains a set of different charges that are driven by zone.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
70
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Sample File
Note To view this file, open Topic 039 - Flat Structure - Sample 001.xls, available in the QAD
Document Library at QAD Transportation Management|PRECISION Reference Guides|
Appendices.
This sample spreadsheet contains two sheets: the formatted PRECISION sheet for PRECISION
and the original sheet received from the carrier. To upload any file to PRECISION, format it to the
structure used by PRECISION.
Flat File Structure – Header Section
The header section defines the cost types, zone identifier, Charge Table name and start date, as
displayed in Figure 5.18. You cannot load the data without completing these sections.
Fig. 5.18
Formatted Excel File
Use the first column for keywords. The keywords determine the purpose of subsequent columns
for that row in the header section. The possible keywords are:
COST-[number]-TYPE. This keyword identifies a particular cost type for the calculations of
charges in the Rate Table section. The [number] uniquely identifies the cost type in the
spreadsheet. For more details, see “Flat File Structure – Rate Table Section”. If you use this
keyword, the second column is the cost type code defined in option CH. The third column is
the description stored on the charge detail line on the Charge Table.
Example COST-1-TYPE has a cost type of ORPCKUP in option CH and a description of
Origin Pickup Charge on the charge detail line for charges generated for this cost type.
CHARGE-TABLE. The code of the Charge Table to create in option TH. If you use this
keyword, the second column is the Charge Table code for the TH record created. The code
cannot be longer than 10 characters.
START-DATE. The start date for the Charge Table to create in option TH. If you use this
keyword, the second column is the start date for the TH record created. The format of this field
in the spreadsheet must be DD/MM/YYYY.
TABLE-DESCRIPTION. The description of the Charge Table to create in option TH. If there is
no description, the description from an existing Charge Table for the same start date is used,
when one already exists in the database. Otherwise, the description defaults to Flat Structure
Charge Table Upload.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
71
ZONE-TYPE. Determine the city field to use in the rating per zone, when city is used in the
determination of the zone. There are four possible values. See the Zone Type field description
in “TABLESECTION” on page 54 for details.
ZONE-PREFIX. Contains the identifier of the zone class records generated in PRECISION
option ZC when you load a flat file format spreadsheet. When the file is loaded, the ZC
records are created to store the relationship between the origin and destination, as per the Rate
Table section. These ZC records are used to find the appropriate set of charges within the
Charge Table. When this keyword is used, the second column is the prefix value for the ZC
records created.
Flat File Structure – Rate Table Section
The Rate Table section defines the rates for the different cost types and the origin/destination
combinations, as displayed in Figure 5.19.
Fig. 5.19
Rate Table Section
The start of the rate table section is determined by the START-TABLE in the first column of a row.
The START-TABLE entry is the last keyword in the header section. The rate table section begins
with a row of keywords that define the purpose of each column. Each keyword determines the
purpose of subsequent rows read from the spreadsheet. Ensure the data relevant to each keyword is
in the correct column. For example, place the shipper country codes under the ShipperCtry
keyword heading. The possible keywords are:
N/A. Any column marked as keyword N/A is skipped in the upload. You can choose to keep
the data from the original carrier spreadsheet for information purposes.
COST-[number]-DISTANCE. Indicates the rate per distance value for a particular cost type.
The [number] indicates the cost type that applies from the COST-[number]-TYPE defined in
the header section. The value in this column is used in conjunction with the DISTANCE
column.
COST-[number]-FIXED. Indicates the fixed value for a particular cost type. The [number]
indicates the cost type that applies from the COST-[number]-TYPE defined in the header
section.
COST-[number]-RATE. Indicates the rate value for a particular cost type. The [number]
indicates the cost type that applies from the COST-[number]-TYPE defined in the header
section. You can also make this keyword more specific:
COST-[number]-RATE-[unit of measure], where [unit of measure] specifies the UOM that
applies for this rate
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
72
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Example COST-1-RATE-Kg indicates that the RATE is per Kg for cost type 1.
COST-[number]-RATE-[unit of measure]-[weight break], where [unit of measure] specifies
the UOM that applies for this rate and [weight break] specifies the upper limit to which this
rate applies.
Example COST-2-RATE-Kg-45 indicates that the RATE is per kg up to 45 kg for cost type 2.
If there is a second column COST-2-RATE-Kg-100, it indicates that the RATE is per kg for
cost type 2 up to 100 kg, where the rate kicks in above 45 kg.
Note Volume can also be handled for the [unit of measure] for these UOM values: M3, CM3,
MM3, FT3, and IN3.
It is also possible to configure a rate per PACK as follows:
COST-[number]-RATE-PACK-[pack type], where [pack type] specifies that the rate only
applies to a particular pack type.
To calculate the rate per pack, regardless of pack type, the column heading is COST-[number]RATE-PACK.
Example COST-2-RATE-PACK-BOX indicates that the RATE is per PACK for packages of
pack type BOX.
It is also possible to configure a rate per CONTAINER as follows:
COST-[number]-RATE-CONT-[container type], where [container type] specifies that the rate
only applies to a particular container type.
To calculate the rate per container, regardless of container type, the column heading is COST[number]-RATE-CONT.
Example COST-2-RATE-CONT-20FT indicates that the RATE is per CONTAINER for
containers of type 20FT.
COST-[number]-MAX. Indicates the maximum value for a particular cost type. The [number]
indicates the cost type that applies from the COST-[number]-TYPE defined in the header
section. A maximum cost only applies where a RATE is also used for the same cost type.
COST-[number]-MIN. Indicates the minimum value for a particular cost type. The [number]
indicates the cost type that applies from the COST-[number]-TYPE defined in the header
section. A minimum cost only applies where a RATE is also used for the same cost type.
CURRENCY. The rates currency for this row of the rate table.
COST-[number]-CURR. Indicates the currency for a particular cost type. The [number]
indicates the cost type that applies from the COST-[number]-TYPE defined in the header
section. This value takes precedence over the CURRENCY field value.
Distance. The number of units of distance between the origin and destination. It is used in
conjunction with the COST-[number]-DISTANCE column for loading rates-per-distance. The
upload program calculates the fixed value from origin to destination for storage in the
database. Use this keyword when the carrier provides spreadsheets on a rate-per-distance
basis.
DESTTRANSITTIME-[number]. This keyword is for future use.
SHIPPERCTRY. The origin country of the lane for which the rates apply. When creating the
ZC records, this keyword determines the Zone From. The cell data for this column must
always be an ISO country code.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine
73
SHIPPERSTATE. The origin state of the lane for which the rates apply. When creating the ZC
records, this keyword determines the Zone From and it is combined with the SHIPPERCTRY
data value.
SHIPPERCITY. The origin city of the lane for which the rates apply. When creating the ZC
records, this keyword determines the Zone From and it is combined with the SHIPPERCTRY
data value.
SHIPPERIATA. This keyword is not currently used.
RECIPIENTCTRY. The recipient country of the lane for which the rates apply. When creating
the ZC records, this keyword determines the Zone To. The cell data for this column must
always be an ISO country code.
RECIPIENTSTATE. The destination city of the lane for which the rates applies. When creating
the ZC records, this keyword determines the Zone To and it is combined with the
RECIPIENTCTRY data value.
RECIPIENTCITY. The destination city of the lane for which the rates applies. When creating
the ZC records, this keyword determines the Zone To and it is combined with the
RECIPIENTCTRY data value.
RECIPIENTIATA. This keyword is not currently used.
RECIPIENTPOSTALFROM. The From Post Code contains the starting postal code of a range
of postal codes. If you have several ranges of postal codes for the same zone class, you can
enter a comma-separated list of postal code starting characters. If you use a comma-separated
list, you cannot use the RECIPIENTPOSTALTO for the same zone class definition line.
RECIPIENTPOSTALTO. Specifies the end postal code for the postal code range definition.
SPECIAL-COMMENTS. This keyword is not currently used.
ZONE. The unique identifier given to a particular lane. If a value is not available, the zone
value is generated as a sequential number. The zone value is combined with the ZONEPREFIX in the header section to create a unique Zone Class in option ZC.
Flat Structure – Sample File Explained
The sample file contains rates for two origins with multiple destinations. The steps to format and
upload the file are the same as for the tier-based file.
1
Format the information so it is accepted by the PRECISION Charge Table upload utility.
2
Save the file to a directory and open PRECISION Windows UI.
3
To open the Charge Table screen, type TH in the QuickPath and press Enter.
4
To upload a Charge Table from a file, click the Upload button. The upload screen is displayed.
5
Select the Tier Flat Structure option and choose the Excel file you saved for upload.
6
To begin the upload, click the green check mark (F2). When the upload has finished, a
message is displayed that Charge Table ABCTABLE has been successfully loaded. Return to
the TH Charge Table list.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
74
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Configuring a Service
After you have uploaded a Charge Table, you can now configure a service based on it. To
configure a carrier service in the Web UI, use the RT option. Create, configure, and maintain
services from this screen.
1
In option RT, click Create.
2
Complete the following fields to create the service:
Route Code. Enter the code for the carrier Service.
Start Date. Enter the Effective Start Date for the carrier Service.
Description. Enter a description for the service. The description is displayed for this service in
the Manifest and Rate Shopping tasks.
Extended Description. Most information in this field is now included elsewhere. The only
position in the comma-separated list that needs a value is the second position. Specify the
name of the applicable Charge Table to associate the rate structure with the service. If a service
is associated with more than one Charge Table, such as an accessorial Charge Table, the
seventh and subsequent positions can be used to enter the additional Charge Table.
Alternative Code. This field is not currently used by the rating, tracking number, and labeling
programs for non-parcel carriers. However, these programs validate this field, so it must not be
blank. You can enter any value.
Carrier. Enter the carrier to associate with this service.
Program. The legacy rating engine program is XTLTLSHP.
Frequency UOM. Although this field is not used, it must contain a value due to legacy issues.
Fig. 5.20
Services Create
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 6
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
This section describes how to upload and configure carrier services using the new rating engine.
76
Describes the benefits of the new rating engine.
Overview
76
Describes how to use the RM screen to create and maintain services and their associated
accessorials.
Creating Rates and Services Manually
Records Created on Service Setup
89
Lists the database tables that store saved services.
89
Add carrier-supplied rates files to the PRECISION application.
Uploading Carrier Rate Files
76
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
The legacy engine allows you to upload your rates into PRECISION and to maintain charge tables
for TL/LTL carriers. However, uploads are sometimes problematic because older versions of Excel
are not able to handle the number of possible zip code combinations in the US.
The legacy rating engine also enables you to configure breaks and zone-based freight rates.
However, it does not allow you to configure zone-based accessorials. For a detailed discussion of
the legacy rating engine, see Chapter 5, “TL/LTL Legacy Rating Engine,” on page 45.
The new rating engine enables you to create different freight rates for different breaks and different
zones. You can also create zone-based accessorials. You can also create a service and rates
structure on one screen. After you create your rate structure, the maintenance is straightforward.
The new engine also enables you to upload large rate structures.
For shippers based in North America using the new engine for TL/LTL carriers, SMC integration
enables shippers to set up discounted rates off Czar Lite and Yellow Freight rates. For more details,
see Chapter 7, “SMC Integration,” on page 99.
Using the new engine, you can choose to:
• Manually create services and their related freight rate structures and accessorials.
• Format and upload carrier-supplied freight rate structures and accessorials.
Creating Rates and Services Manually
The Rate Maintenance option RM in Windows UI allows you to enter and maintain carrier rates.
These rates, which are associated with a carrier service, are then used in:
• Calculation of shipment charges when rating a shipment transaction.
• Freight rate shopping to offer a choice of carrier services.
• Freight shop quotation without an existing shipment transaction.
The RM screen is a one-stop-shop that you can use to:
• Add new services and the associated rates and zones.
• Update rates for an existing service.
• Review expired and future rates for existing services.
• Add or delete accessorials for a particular service.
• Expire rates for an existing service.
• Create and maintain LTL/TL services based on carriers giving discounts off standard base
tariff structures such as Yellow Freight or Czar Lite rate structures. See Chapter 7, “SMC
Integration,” on page 99.
Note The RM screen is not used for maintenance of the standard base tariffs such as Yellow
Freight or Czar Lite rate structures.
Rate Maintenance Screen
The RM screen contains:
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
77
• Header fields
• Update Rates tab
• Accessorials tab
• Expire Rates tab
• Review Rates tab
Header Fields
Service. Select the service that this rate structure applies to. You can choose an existing
service or enter a new one. If you enter a new service, a message is displayed, asking whether
you want to add a service. Click Yes. In the next field, enter a service description. The service
code and description are used to automatically create an associated Route record in option RT.
Transport mode. This field is optional. Enter the mode of transport related to this service; for
example, ROAD. The value entered here is automatically populated in the Normal Transport
Mode field on the Route record.
Carrier. This field is mandatory. Enter the carrier partner code of the carrier supplying the
service. You can select an existing carrier or create a new one. This step also creates a record
in NR. If you are creating a carrier, enter the name of the carrier in the next field. Otherwise,
this field displays the name of the existing carrier. If you are creating a carrier, the name
entered here also appears on the NR record.
Global Carrier Code. Each new carrier needs a global carrier code. It is recommended that you
use four-character codes, such as the SCAC code, as displayed in Table 6.1. You can also
choose your own four-character code. After the Global Carrier Code has been created, you can
now maintain other features for this carrier such as tracking numbers or freight uplifts.
Table 6.1 
Global Carrier System Carrier Example
Category
Sample Key
Sample Value
SPS
GLOBAL CARRIER FOR GOETZE
GTZE
One way. By default, the One Way field is not selected to allow for two-way zoning. If you
select this field:
• The rates apply from the origin zone to destination zone but not from the destination zone
to origin zone.
• All zones included in this service are one way.
If any of the zone-specific rates in the service are intended for two-way shipping, do not select
this field. Set the one-way zone-specific rates at zone level on the Update Rates tab.
In use. By default, this field is selected. If you clear this field, the service is not in use, even if
you are shipping within the effective dates of the service. For example, you might make a
service temporarily unavailable due to adverse weather conditions or a temporary change in
the rate basis for a service.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
78
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Preferred Carrier. If you select this field, a message is displayed in the Windows UI Rate
Shopping results screen in the Instructions column, indicating that the service is a preferred
carrier. If a carrier service is not flagged, the message Not Preferred Carrier is displayed.
These messages are for information purposes only. They do not affect the actual rating or use
of a service.
Max weight. If the carrier has specified a maximum weight that can be shipped, enter a value
in this field. If you try to use this service for a shipment above that weight, an error message is
generated.
UOM. Enter a UOM code associated with the weight fields; for example, lb.
Check next tier. If the rate at the current weight break is higher than the rate at the next break,
you can check the next available break to see whether it is cheaper to rate the shipment as a
higher quantity. This practice is known as deficit weighting.
Max charge. Specify a maximum charge to apply to this service. This field is an upper
threshold for the freight rates. If the calculated freight charge for a shipment rated with this
service is higher than the Max Charge, Max Charge is used instead.
Carrier Max. Specify a maximum amount that the carrier charges for this service.
Min charge. Specify a minimum charge to apply to this service. This field is a lower threshold
for the freight rates. If the calculated freight charge for a shipment rated with this service is
lower than the Min Charge, Min Charge is used instead.
Carrier Min. Specify the minimum amount that the carrier charges for this service.
MC Discount. This field is used for SMC integration. For more details, see Chapter 7, “SMC
Integration,” on page 99.
Single Ship. This field is used for SMC integration. For more details, see Chapter 7, “SMC
Integration,” on page 99.
When you have completed the fields, click the green check mark, as highlighted in Figure 6.1.
Fig. 6.1
RM Header Fields
Update Rates Tab
On this tab, enter or maintain rate and zone details for the service. You can enter as many records
as you need.
Rate Basis. Select the basis on which to calculate the rate. The rate basis is the calculation
method for the rates. The most common bases involve mileage or weight. The choices
available are based on a system value.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
Table 6.2 
Configuring the Rate Basis List
Category
Key
Value
LTL
RATE BASIS
Flat or Percentage,1|
Mileage,2|
dont-useCrowFly,3|
Mileage per hundred,4|
Gross Weight,5|
Hundred Gross Weight,6|
Net Weight,7|
dont-useNetNet Weight,8|
Volume,9|
Quantity,10|
Inners,11|
Outers,12|
dont-useFreight class,13|
dont-useVolume/Weight,14|
Pack,15|
dont-useStops,16|
Containers,17|
As displayed in Table 6.2, any list item you do not want to display is marked as dont-use.
Table 6.3 provides an explanation of each list item.
Table 6.3 
Rate Basis Explanations
Rate Basis
Explanation
Flat or Percentage Flat fee or percentage.
Mileage
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per mile or kilometer. The calculated total is based
on the number of miles or kilometers included in the Shipment Distance field,
XMSHDR0.SHPDST.
CrowFly
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per crow fly distance. The calculated total is based
on the number of miles or kilometers included in the Shipment CrowFly Distance field,
XMSHDR0.SHCDST.
Mileage per
hundred
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per 100 miles or kilometers. The calculated total is
based on the number of miles or kilometers included in the Shipment Distance field,
XMSHDR0.SHPDST.
Gross Weight
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per unit of the shipment gross weight.
Hundred Gross
Weight
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per each 100 units of the shipment gross weight.
Net Weight
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per unit of the shipment net weight.
NetNet Weight
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per unit of the shipment net net weight.
Volume
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per unit of the shipment volume.
Quantity
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per unit of the shipment quantity.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
79
80
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Rate Basis
Explanation
Inners
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per pack type inner. If no pack type is specified in
RM, the calculated total charge is based on the number of inners in the shipment header
Total No. of Inners field XMSHDR0.SHCASE. If a pack type is specified in RM, the
calculated total is based on the sum of the number of inners of this type found across all
shipment item lines in the No. of Inners field XMSITM0.SIPCK1. This approach allows
for different rates per different types of inners.
Outers
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per pack type outer. If no pack type is specified in
RM, the calculated total charge is based on the number of outers in the shipment header
Total No. of Outers field XMSHDR0.SHPAL. If a pack type is specified in RM, the
calculated total is based on the sum of number of outers of this type found across all
shipment item lines in the No. of Outers field XMSITM0.SIPCK2. This allows for
different rates for different types of outers.
Freight Class
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per freight class. This rate basis is rarely used
because Freight Class is usually used in conjunction with a weight-based service. If the
rate basis is Gross Weight, freight classes are included in the rate details along with
weight breaks.
Volume/Weight
This rate basis is rarely used because there are separate fields in RM allowing input of
volumetric weight conversion details.
Pack
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per pack type. The calculated total is based on the
number of pack types in the shipment Total No. of Packs field XMSHDR0.SHPACK.
Stops
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per stop. This rate basis is currently not used
because the rating engines associated with Rate Maintenance and SMC integration are
only called at shipment level and not from load level transactions.
Containers
Configure a rate and/or fixed amount per container type. The calculated total is based on
the number of records of matching container type found in the shipment container Asset
Type XMSCNT0.SCTYPE field. If XMSCNT0.SCTYPE is blank, the total is based on
the number of records of matching container type found in the shipment container Asset
Id field XMSCNT0.SCASID.
A service can only have one rate basis in the Update Rates tab. If you need weight-based rates
for some zones and mileage-based rates for other zones, create two services—one service for
weight-based rates and zones and one for mileage-based rates and zones. Different rate bases
are only allowed on the Accessorials tab.
Value Basis. This field is only displayed when the selected rate basis is Flat or Percentage.
Select the value on which to base the percentage rate.
YFUS:US. This field is displayed when the rate basis is Flat or Percentage, where a carrier
offers discounts off the standard Yellow Freight YF500 rates. The field is used when you have
a full set of maintained YFUS:US rates in PRECISION. However, the recommended approach
for discounting off Yellow Freight rates is to use SMC integration, which is described in
Chapter 7, “SMC Integration,” on page 99.
YFUS:CA. This field is displayed when the rate basis is Flat or Percentage when the service
offers discounts off the standard Yellow Freight YF510 rates for US to Canada. The field is
used when you have a full set of maintained YFUS:CA rates in PRECISION. However, the
recommended approach for discounting off Yellow Freight rates is to use SMC integration,
which is described in Chapter 7, “SMC Integration,” on page 99.
Other. This field is displayed when the rate basis is Flat or Percentage. The field is used when
the service offers discounts off another set of rates in the system, other than Yellow
Freight/Czar Lite rates.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
81
SMC. This field is displayed when the rate basis is Flat or Percentage. The field is used to
indicate the service being created is used for SMC integration, which is described in Chapter
7, “SMC Integration,” on page 99.
Rate ID. Enter the rate ID, which is the tariff name the service is based on; for example,
YFSY500. This rate ID must exist in the RN table.
CAF%. Select this field to enable you to enter a percentage for Currency Adjustment Factor.
CAF is calculated as a percentage of the freight charge and applies for all existing breaks and
zones in the service. If CAF is required as a charge calculation other than as a Percentage of
Freight, leave these CAF fields blank and instead set up CAF as an accessorial charge with a
different calculation method such as percentage of shipping value or fixed amount.
The cost code can be defaulted in from system values, as displayed in Table 6.4, to read CAF
for the next field.
Table 6.4 
CAF
Category
Key
Value
LTL
CAF COST CODE
CAF
Fuel %. This field allows you to enter a percentage figure for the fuel surcharge. Fuel
surcharge is calculated as a percentage of Freight + CAF. It applies for all existing breaks and
zones in the service. If fuel surcharge is required as a charge calculation other than as a
percentage of Freight + CAF, leave these fields blank and instead set up the fuel surcharge as
an accessorial charge with a different calculation method such as percentage of shipping value.
The cost code can be defaulted in from system values, as displayed in Table 6.5, to read FUEL
for the next field.
Table 6.5 
Fuel
Category
Key
Value
LTL
FUEL COST CODE
FUEL
Average Pack Weight. If you choose a weight or volume rate basis, you can enter the average
pack weight in this field.
Vol to Wght Factor. This field is displayed when the rate basis is weight or volume based.
Enter the factor for converting shipment volume to a weight equivalent. The PRECISION
rating engine performs the following operation to compare the Actual Gross Weight and
Volumetric Weight.
1
The system determines the volumetric weight from the system value in Table 6.6, which
contains the default UOM code for volume. If the shipment volume UOM is different to the
system UOM, the shipment volume is converted to the system UOM.
Table 6.6 
UOM
2
Category
Key
Value
System
UOM - DEFAULT VOLUME
<UOM code for volume>
To calculate the weight equivalent of the volume, the volume is multiplied or divided by the
value in the Vol to Wght Factor field.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
82
3
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Compare the shipment Weight field value—for example, Gross Weight—and Volumetric
Weight value. The higher value is used to determine the rate break and the rate for the
calculation.
The rate basis must be a weight or volume related basis—such as gross weight—and the Vol to
Wght Factor field must be populated with a value for the volume to weight conversion to be
performed when rate shopping.
Note For an example see Topic055 - Sample 001 - Volumetric Weight Conversion.doc on the
QAD Document Library in Transportation Management|Reference Guides|Appendices. The
images in the example are from a previous version of PRECISION.
Wght/Vol Volume UOM. This field is displayed when the rate basis is weight or volume based.
Enter the volume UOM code.
Vol to Wght Multiply. This field is displayed when the rate basis is weight or volume based. It
determines whether the value entered for the volume to weight conversion factor is to be used
for division or multiplication. If you select this field, the shipment volume in the system
volume UOM is multiplied by the conversion rate to give the volumetric weight. If not
selected, the shipment volume in the system volume UOM is divided by the conversion rate to
give the volumetric weight.
From Date, To Date. If the rates are for a specified period, enter effective start and end dates
for these rates. This field enables you to enter future rates in advance. Future rates are visible
on the Review Rates tab.
Min Weight. Enter the minimum weight to apply to the shipment. Where a shipment Gross
Weight is less than the Min Weight, the rate applied to the shipment is the rate associated with
rate break into which the Min Weight falls.
Allow zero validation. Select this field when a charge with zero value is allowed and displays
when rating or freight shopping.
The next section of the screen allows you to enter origin and destination zone details.
Country. Enter the origin country code that applies for the rates. This field is mandatory and is
the minimum From Zone criteria.
Postal Range. Enter the origin postal code or range of postal codes for which the rates apply.
If the origin zone is one specific postal code, enter the full postal code in the first Postal Range
field; for example 90210. This postal code defaults into the second Postal Range field, as
displayed in Figure 6.2.
Fig. 6.2
One Origin Zone
If the origin zone is a specific range of postal codes with the same prefix, enter a three-digit
prefix in both Postal Range fields. For example, Figure 6.3 displays the configuration for an
origin in the range 90200 to 90299, for a country where the post code length is 5 digits.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
83
Fig. 6.3
Origin Zone Range - Same Prefix
If the origin zone is a range of postal codes, enter the range in both Postal Range fields, using
the full postal range. For example, Figure 6.4 displays the configuration for an origin in the
range 90210 to 90248.
Fig. 6.4
Origin Zone Range
City. Enter the origin city code or city name for which the rates apply.
State. Enter the origin State code for which the rates apply.
The fields in the To section behave in the same way and are for destination zone details. As with
the From section, the Country field is mandatory.
FC From, FC To, Rate Freight Class. These fields are used together, and allow you to specify
a range of freight classes that are classed as a different freight class for rating purposes. For
example, all classes from Freight Class 55 to Class 85 are rated as Class 50.
One Way. Select this field when a rate entry only applies for the origin zone to destination
zone but not for freight in the other direction. However, if the service header is selected as one
way only, by default all zone records are automatically flagged as One Way. If the automatic
flag of One Way is then removed at Zone level, you encounter rating errors when attempting to
rate a shipment where the Shipper address is included in the To zone of the service and the
Ship-to address is included in the From zone of the service. In this case, the shipment does not
match the one way configuration specified at the Service header level.
Currency. The currency that applies to the rate entered. This field is mandatory. You can set a
default currency code to appear for new rates entered.
Table 6.7 
Default Currency
Category
Key
Value
LTL
DEFAULT CURRENCY
Any currency code defined in option CU.
Fixed Amount. Enter the Fixed amount or Flat fee for this charge to the customer.
Rate Per Unit. Enter the rate per unit charged to the customer. If you enter a fixed amount in
the Fixed Amount field and a Rate Per Unit in this field, the two values are calculated and
summed to make the charge amount. The value is the shipper charge to the customer.
Percent. If the rate basis is Flat or Percentage, you can enter a percentage of the value you
specify as the Value Basis. If you enter a fixed amount in the Fixed Amount field and a percent
in this field, the two values are calculated and summed to make the charge amount. The value
is the shipper charge to the customer.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
84
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Minimum. Enter the minimum charge to the customer when applying these rates.
Discount %. For a service intended for SMC integration or to be used as a discount off another
rate ID baseline rate—as specified in the Rate Id field—enter the percent discount to apply to
the other rate ID.
Min Charge Floor. If a discount yields a freight charge lower than the minimum charge floor,
the value in Min Charge Floor is taken instead. For example, the value in Min Charge Floor is
$200. The freight charge after discount is applied is $185. In this case, $200 is taken as the
freight charge as it is the lowest possible cost above the charge floor.
Cost Code. Enter a cost code such as FRT.
Carrier Fixed Amount. Enter the fixed amount charged to the shipper by the carrier.
Carrier Rate Per Unit. Enter the rate per unit charged to the shipper by the carrier.
Carrier %. This field is displayed when you select the Flat or Percentage rate basis. It performs
the same function as the Percent field but it contains the percentage that the carrier charges the
shipper.
Rate UOM. Enter the rate UOM, which is dependent on the Rate Basis. Generally, it is used
with weight-based rates.
Rate basis override. This field enables you to enter a second rate basis on which to calculate
the freight rate. This rate basis is combined with the main rate basis to return your total. For
example, a rate can be calculated on mileage but also on a per carriage basis when transporting
by rail.
Freight Class. Enter the freight class for this rate. When configuring a weight-based service—
Gross Weight, Net Weight, Hundred Gross Weight—it is often required to use different rates
per weight break for different freight classes, as the example in Table 6.8 displays.
Table 6.8 
Different Weight Breaks for Different Classes
Freight Class
Weight Break in lbs
Rate Per lb
50
0– 500
$3
50
501-3000
$2.50
50
3001-7000
$2
55
0-500
$4
55
501-3000
$3.50
55
3001-7000
$3
For more details, see Topic055 - Sample 002 - Different Rates for Freight Classes.doc on the
QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|PRECISION Reference Guides|
Appendices. The images in the example are from a previous version of PRECISION.
From Break, To Break. The range of breaks for which the rates are applicable (From and To
values into which the Rate Basis criteria falls). If you have several weight breaks for a service,
enter a separate record for each break. You can copy an existing record and amend it.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
85
Break UOM. Enter the unit of measure for the break range, which is dependent on the rate
basis you select. You can enter a Break UOM that is different to the Rate UOM. With the
Divisor field, the system converts UOMs automatically when calculating rates. For example,
you can rate in tons but have your weight breaks and shipment weight in pounds.
Divisor. This field contains the factor to convert Rate UOM to Break UOM. For example, the
service weight breaks are in pounds, the shipment weight is pounds, but the rates are in Tons.
The system works out the Ton rate in pounds using this divisor. The divisor defaults from the
UOM set up in the master table UO for MASS dim/scope, but you can manually override it.
Pack Type. Enter the pack type such as pallet, container, or carton. When configuring a pack
based service such as Inners, Outers, Packs, or Containers, it is often necessary to use different
rates for each type of package.
Fig. 6.5
Mileage-based Example Record
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
86
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 6.6
Weight-based Example Record
The bottom browse shows the rate records comprising the Service. The bottom browse contains a
standard set of buttons:
• New Rates enables you to add a new set of rates for this service.
• Copy Rates enables you to copy an existing set of rates. This feature is useful if you are
creating similar records with different weight breaks or zones.
• Modify Rates enables you to maintain a set of rates.
• Delete an entry enables you to delete a set of rates associated with a service.
• XML Rates enables you to create an xml file of your rates. This feature is useful for moving
rates from one environment to another, such as from test to production.
Important When you add records to a service, the details for each set of rates can change.
However, you cannot change the rate basis. You must create a new service for a different rate
basis.
Accesorials Tab
The Accesorials tab allows you to add extra charges and costs to your service rates. Accessorials
can be charged on any rate basis. The main features of accessorials on the RM screen are:
• You can have different rate bases for different accessorials. For example, you can create a flat
rate accessorial and a mileage-based accessorial for a weight-based service.
• You can have zone-based accessorials. It is possible to specify different accessorials for
different zones.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
87
The available fields are similar to those on the Update Rates tab. This section describes additional
fields that are specific to the Accessorials tab.
Always apply to service. Select this field when the accessorial always applies to the service.
For example, when there are always tarping charges on a service, they must always be
included in the total cost of the service. The accessorial is not included in the base freight but
is displayed as a separate charge line on the shipment transaction. The overall consignment
value is the total of the freight and accessorials. When this field is cleared, the accessorial must
be manually selected for inclusion in the shipment for it to be calculated.
Value Basis. The possible value bases are displayed in Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 
Value Basis Explanations
Value Basis
Explanation
Shipping
Percentage of shipment total shipping value (XMSHDR0.SHCUMT).
Statistical
Percentage of shipment total statistical value (XMSHDR0.SHFOBV).
Cost
Percentage of shipment total cost value (XMSHDR0.SHCOST).
Insurance
Percentage of shipment insured value (XMSHDR0.SHINSV).
Charge Code
The system can contain one or a list of charge codes on which to base the percentage
when an accumulation of previous costs must be summed before the current cost
percentage is calculated.
For example, the insurance premium charge is to be calculated as a percentage of the
sum of Freight + Handling charges. This functionality is typically useful when
configuring accessorials.
Combination of
Shipping /
Statistical / Cost /
Insurance value
and Cost List
This value basis generally applies for accessorials. Use it where an accumulation of
previous costs must be summed and added to a shipment value before the current cost
percentage is calculated; for example, insurance is calculated as a percentage of the sum
of Shipment value + Freight + Handling charges.
For this scenario, select Shipping. In the COST LIST field, add a list of cost codes such
as freight and handling. To add a cost code to the include list for the current percentage
calculation, click the New Rates button. For example, Insurance Premium is based on
percentage of Freight + Handling, so include the Freight and Handling cost code in the
Cost Code list when configuring the insurance premium cost.
The Code List field displays the list of cost codes the current percentage calculation is to
be based on.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
88
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 6.7
Accessorial Example Record
Expire Rates Tab
The Expire Rates tab enables you to expire a set of rates. Expired rates are not deleted from the
service. However, they are no longer used in rating or shopping. The Dispatch Date on the
shipment transaction is compared with the rate effective date range to determine the rates that
apply for the shipment.
Eff. Date to Expiry. Enter the date as you entered it on the Update Rates tab.
New Expiry Date. Enter the date you now want to expire the rates. For example, if the effective
expiry date on the Update Rates tab is 12/31/13, you can expire these rates early by entering
12/01/13.
Review Rates Tab
This tab enables you to review:
• Expired rates
• Future rates
However, you cannot maintain future rates. It is only possible to view them. Wait until the rates
become effective before you can edit them with the Update Rates tab.
Note Future accessorials are not displayed on this tab. To view future accessorials, enter the RN
option and choose the Engine Calculation sub-option.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
89
Records Created on Service Setup
When the RM screen is used to enter rates for a carrier service, the following records are created:
• When you complete the header fields, the service is created in RT. The service is now available
for use by Routing Guide rules and for Rate Shopping.
• When you complete the header fields, a service record is created in SE. This database table is
required when multiple rating IDs are required for one service. For example, when a service is
discounted off a standard Yellow Freight service held on SMC Rateware, the SE Service
record contains two Rating IDs. There is one Rating ID for the Yellow Freight service on SMC
and one for the carrier service offering the discount.
• When you save the Updates Rates fields, the LTL/TL rate, zone, and axis definitions are saved
in RN.
Uploading Carrier Rate Files
Generally, TL/LTL rates files are sourced from the carrier. These rates files are often text fixedlength or CSV files that you must upload to the PRECISION application. This section describes
how to upload the files for use by the new rating engine.
Formatting Rates Files
If the LTL rates files provided by the carrier are not in the required format, you must map the
columns in the Excel/CSV/Fixed length file to the required format using LTLFM2, as displayed in
Figure 6.8.
Fig. 6.8
LTFM2
File Type ID. This field enables you to choose an ID for the file to be formatted. The file type
is saved in a VALUESTORE category system value. If the same file type is specified in the
future, the other field values can be retrieved to the screen automatically. For example, when
you specify a file type as ROADWAY, any ROADWAY file you format in the future will
populate this screen with the same values used to format it previously.
File Type. Choose Standard LTL Format or Carrier Specific Format.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
90
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
File Format. Depending on the format you choose, the screen layout changes accordingly. If
you choose CSV, all fields that can possibly appear in the file are displayed on the LTLFM2
screen as entry numbers within the comma-separated file. When the value entered in a field is
zero, it is ignored.
If you choose Fixed Length, all fields that can possibly be present in the file are displayed on
the LTLFM2 screen as start positions with a specified field length, as displayed in Figure 6.9.
The position indicates where in the fixed length text file the field begins. The length specifies
the number of characters to be read for that field.
Fig. 6.9
LTFM2 Fixed Length Option
Input File. Enter the location and name of the carrier rates file to format for upload.
Output File. Enter the name of the resulting formatted file to be created in the PRECISION
format for subsequent upload.
Rate Entries Amended. This field displays the results when you format a file, as displayed in
Figure 6.8.
The following fields are possible entries in the carrier rates file to be formatted. Depending on the
File Format you select, include either the Entry number or the Position/Length corresponding to
the field in the carrier rates file on the LTLFM2 screen. If no corresponding field is included in the
carrier rates file to be formatted, leave the Entry number or Position/Length as 0, which means it is
ignored.
Accessorial. Determines whether the charge is an accessorial. This is typically a Y or N
indicator in the carrier rates file.
Carrier. Carrier Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC) code or other Carrier ID in the carrier
rates file.
Carrier name. Carrier name.
Service. Service ID.
Service desc. Service description.
Transport mode. Mode of transport.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
91
Rate basis. The rate basis that applies to the service; for example, Mileage or Gross Weight.
Region from, Region from2. The starting origin zip code for which the rate applies. If it is a
range, also enter the end origin zip code.
Shipper ctry, State, City. The origin country, state, and city for which the rates apply.
Region to, Region to2. The destination zip code for which the rates apply. If it is a range, enter
the ending zip.
Ship to ctry, State, City. The destination country, state, and city for which the rates apply.
Effective date, Expire date. The date when the rates become effective, and the date on which
the rates expire.
From Class, To Class. The Freight class or range of Freight classes to which these rates apply.
Rate Freight Class. The Rate Freight class to which these rates apply. For example, a carrier
may issue a range of freight classes (as included in the From Freight Class/To Freight Class
elements), which are to be treated as another freight class for rating purposes. For example,
from class 50 to class 125, rate these all at the freight associated with class 150. Therefore, in
this example, the Rate Freight Class is 150.
Pack type. The pack type to which the rates apply when the Rate Basis is a package-related
basis—Packs, Containers, Inners, or Outers.
Break from, Break to. The starting and ending break points for which the rates apply.
Break UOM. The UOM that applies to the breaks.
Rates UOM. The UOM that applies to the rates.
Freight Class. The freight class for which these rates apply.
Divisor. The divisor for the rates used to decimalize the rates provided.
Amount. The rate per unit that applies to these rates.
Fix amount. The fixed amount that applies to these rates.
Minimum. The minimum charge for these rates. When the calculated charge—based on Rate
per Unit and/or Fixed Amount—is less than the Minimum charge, the Minimum charge is
used instead.
Discount Rate id. Use this field if the carrier rate file being formatted is for a service which is
discounted off existing Czar Lite or Yellow Freight baseline rates—available through SMC
integration. Identify the Entry number or Position/Length where the ID of the Czar
Lite/Yellow Freight rate ID is located in the carrier rate file.
Discount. The percentage of discount to apply to the rates calculated from the Discount Rate
ID.
Discount floor. The lowest amount to apply to the rates after a discount is applied.
Currency. The rate currency.
One way. Determines whether the charge applies only to a one-way zone or also to the reverse
of the Shipper/ShipTo zone. This setting is typically a Y or N flag in the carrier rates file.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
92
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Preferred. Determines whether the Service should be flagged as a Preferred Carrier. This
setting is typically a Y or N flag in the carrier rates file.
Min Weight. The minimum weight allowed for the service.
Max Weight. The maximum weight allowed for the service.
Check next tier. Determines whether the next highest weight break should be checked for a
lower rate. This setting is typically a Y or N flag in the carrier rates file.
Loading Rates Files
To load the formatted TL/LTL text file into the database, use the Windows UI option LTLRT2, as
displayed in Figure 6.10.
Fig. 6.10
LTLRT2
Origin Country. Specify the Ship From country. Select US, Canada, or Determine from file
contents. If you select Determine from file contents, the Shipper Country should have been
identified in the file formatting LTLFM2 option.
Destination Country. Specify the Ship To country. Select US, Canada, or Determine from file
contents. If you select Determine from file contents, the Ship To Country should have been
identified in the file formatting LTLFM2 option.
Accessorial upload. If selected, this field indicates that you are uploading accessorial charges
rather than base freight rates.
Append to existing service. If selected, this field indicates that the charges relate to an existing
service and are to be added to it.
Service based on SMC Integration. If selected, this field indicates that the service being
uploaded is used with SMC integration to create a service which is a discount off a baseline
rate structure held in SMC.
Service. Enter the service name that the rates apply to. The service name must already exist in
the database. If this field is blank, the service is named with the carrier Standard Carrier Alpha
Code (SCAC) or Carrier ID as identified in the LTLFM2 formatting.
Transport mode. If the transport mode is not contained in the file resulting from LTLFM2
formatting, enter a transport mode.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
93
Rate basis. If the Rate Basis is not contained in the file resulting from LTLFM2 formatting,
select the rate basis to apply from the drop down list. For example, Mileage, Gross Weight,
Flat or Percentage, or Packs.
Cost code. Select the cost code for the charges, such as FRT for freight.
Divisor. If no rate divisor is provided in the rates file, this field determines by how much each
of the rates in the file is to be divided.
Break UOM. If the UOM for the breaks are not contained in the file resulting from LTLFM2
formatting, enter the UOM in this field.
Input File. Specify the formatted LTL/TL rates file to load.
Rate Entries Created. When you upload the file, this field displays the number of rate entries
created.
Rate Entries Amended. When you upload the file, this field displays information on the rate
entries amended.
Records Created on Upload
When you upload a carrier rating file to PRECISION, new records are automatically created.
• In the new rating engine (RN), a rating ID is automatically created when you upload a
formatted file. The record contains all rating ID information, including calculations, axes,
regions, and zones.
• In SE, a service record is automatically created when you upload a formatted file for a service
that did not already exist in the database. The record contains all the rating IDs associated with
a particular service, including rating IDs used for charge calculation or transit times purposes.
• In RT, a route record is automatically created when you upload a formatted file. It is available
to assign to a shipment or in Routing Guide rules service assignment. The route record
contains the name of the new rating engine program, XTRTESHP.r. For the new rating engine
program, the extended route description field RTDES2 is not required and is blank.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
94
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 6.11
RT Record
Formatting Transit Time Files
Before you load transit time files provided by the carrier into PRECISION, format them using the
Windows UI option TRTFMT, as displayed in Figure 6.12.
Fig. 6.12
TRTFMT
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
95
File Type. Transit time information can be provided by a carrier in two files. The first file
contains a list of zip codes and the carrier terminal or hub that services them. The second file
contains a From and To terminal and the number of days it takes to deliver from one to the
other. Select whether you are formatting the Zip Code/Terminal file or the No of Days file.
The fields displayed then vary, depending on whether the Zip Code/Terminal file or the No of
Days file is being formatted. If the carrier provides only one file, you need only format the Zip
Codes/Terminal file.
File Format. The carrier file can be in CSV or Fixed Length text format. Depending on the
format you choose, the layout of the screen changes. If you choose CSV, all fields that can be
present in the file are displayed as entry numbers within the comma-separated file. If you
choose Fixed Length file format, all the fields that can appear in the file are displayed as start
positions, with a specified field length, as displayed in Figure 6.13.
Carrier. Enter the carrier code.
Service. Enter the service code to which the transit time information is to be added. If this field
is blank, the transit time information is added to all the services for the carrier entered in the
previous field.
Country. Enter the origin country for which these transit times apply.
Input File. Specify the location of the file to be formatted.
Output File. Specify the location where the output file is to be placed after formatting.
Fig. 6.13
TRTFMT Fixed Length Option
For CSV files, input the entry number of the field in the file. For fixed length files, enter the
starting position and length of the field.
From Zip, To Zip. The origin zip code and the destination zip code to which the transit times
apply.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
96
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Terminal. The identifier for the carrier terminal or hub within the transit time file.
Country, City, State. If these columns are in use, enter the relevant positions in these fields.
Direct/Interline. This field is currently not in use.
From Terminal, To Terminal. This field is displayed when the file type being formatted is No of
Days. The field allows for identifying the location in the No of Days file for the From and To
carrier terminals or hub IDs.
Transit Time. The number of units of transit time.
Transit UOM. The unit of measure of the transit time.
Outbound Extra Days, Inbound Extra Days. You can adjust the default transit time for a
From/To Zone combination by adding extra days. The origin zone holds the number of
outbound extra days and the destination zone holds the number of inbound extra days.
To process the file, click the green check mark.
Uploading Transit Times
When you have formatted the transit time files provided by the carrier, you can upload them into
PRECISION using the Windows UI option TRTRTS, as displayed in Figure 6.14.
Formatted upload is used for files that you formatted with the TRTFMT option. The zip
codes/terminal and transit days files must be uploaded simultaneously, which is the general use
case in the US.
Fig. 6.14
TRTRTS
Specify the Input files for the Zip Codes/Terminal and the Number of Days files. To upload them
into PRECISION, click the green check mark.
You also have the option of uploading an Excel file, as displayed in Figure 6.15. Enter the relevant
carrier and service that the transit times apply to and specify the relevant input file.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL New Rating Engine
97
Fig. 6.15
TRTRTS Excel Option
Records Created on Upload
When you upload a transit time file or files to PRECISION, new records are automatically created.
• In RN, a new rating ID is created with regions and zones, where the format of the rating id is T
xxxx, where xxxx represents the name of the service. You can see the number of transit days on
the zone record.
• In SE, a new rating ID is added to the service with a sequence of 999999, which is a reserved
sequence number automatically generated after the upload of a transit time file.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
98
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 7
SMC Integration
This section describes how to use SMC integration with the new rating engine.
100
Provides an overview of how SMC helps you to calculate freight charges.
Overview
100
Describes how to set up your system to communicate with SMC.
Configuring Connectivity System Values
102
Describes how to set up a service that uses SMC functionality.
Setting up the Service
106
Describes how to format and import services that use SMC.
Importing SMC Services and Rates
108
Provides details on some resources available when troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting
111
Provides a sample setup for SMC integration.
Sample Setup
100
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
This section covers the SMC integration engine, which allows the LTL rating engine to connect
with SMC RateWare XL (RXWL) software to obtain freight charges for the shipments.
SMC3 is the company providing the software that returns freight costings to the LTL rating engine.
RateWare XL (RXWL) software is a web service. It is a platform-independent software
component that is accessed over a network. It is described by WSDL and is capable of being
accessed through standard network protocols such as—but not limited to—SOAP over HTTP.
The LTL rating engine sends an XML request to SMC RXWL software. This software then returns
an XML response. The rating engine interprets this XML and stamps the freight charges on the
shipment, as displayed in Figure 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
SMC Carrier Integration Solution Model
LTL Rating Engine SMC RateWare XL Web Service Create Shipment
Send XML with shipment attributes using SOAP
message over HTTP Rate Shipment
RXWL Software
Return Shipment Charges RXWL and other SMC software products are licensed to users directly by SMC. Any warranties
for these products are made by SMC. To configure SMC for use:
1
Create the system values for accessing the SMC RXWL software.
2
Create SMC services and rate discounts from scratch or upload SMC services and rate
discounts from a file.
Configuring Connectivity System Values
To enable the LTL rating engine to connect to the SMC RWXL software, set up the system values
in Table 7.1.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
SMC Integration
101
Table 7.1 
SMC Connectivity System Values
Category
Key
Value
LTL
SMC: AUTHENTICATION <LOCN>
The value includes:
• License Key
• Password
• User email-address
• URL address
For example:
SMC: AUTHENTICATION - A9901
For example:
A9A9A9A9|PA55WORD|[email protected]|
http://demo.smc3.com/AdminManager/services/RateWare
XL
LTL
SMC: SOAP ENVELOPE ADR –
AXXXX
For example:
SMC: SOAP ENVELOPE ADR –
A9901
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
The value defines a framework for describing what is in
the XML message and tells SMC RWXL how to process
the contents.
For example:
xmlns:soapenv=
http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/,xmlns:web=
http://webservices.smc.com,xmlns:web1=
http://web.ltl.smc.com
102
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Setting up the Service
To begin, create the Yellow Freight or Czar Lite tariff in PRECISION that the service is based on.
The tariff is the base rate against which your service is discounted. The structure behind this tariff
is held by SMC.
Rating ID. Enter a rating ID for the tariff.
Fig. 7.2
RN Screen
Description. Enter a description for the base tariff.
Rating Type. Select SMC as the rating type.
Fig. 7.3
RN Screen
RM Screen
Next, create the service and its weight break discounts. To create the service, open the RM screen.
Header Fields
Fig. 7.4
Header Fields
Service. Enter the service code and a description. If it is a new service, a message is displayed
asking if you want to create the new service. Click Yes.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
SMC Integration
103
Carrier. Enter the name of the carrier providing the service.
MC Discount. If you have agreed a discount with your carrier on the returned shipment charge
from SMC, enter the percentage in this field. The percentage is to be subtracted from the
shipment charge when it is greater than the minimum charge floor. RWXL compares the
shipment charge returned to the minimum charge floor. If the shipment charge returned is less
than the minimum charge floor, the charge floor applies and this percentage is not used.
However, if the shipment charge returned is higher than the net charge calculated from the
minimum charge floor field, the minimum charge applies. The percentage in the MC Discount
field is then subtracted from the minimum charge.
Example Table 7.2 and Table 7.3 show the effects of applying an MC Discount to the
shipment charges returned. For details of the other fields in the table, see “Update Rates Tab”
on page 104.
Table 7.2 
No MC Discount
Step
Value
Minimum Charge Floor
215
SMC amount returned (including Discount%)
235
MC Discount
0
Total Freight Cost
235 - 0 = 235
Table 7.3 
With MC Discount
Step
Value
Minimum Charge Floor
215
SMC amount returned (including Discount%)
235
MC Discount
10%
Total Freight Cost
235 - 23.50 = 211.50
However, this is less than the minimum charge floor, so
the final charge is 215.
Check Next Tier. To enable the system to check whether the next weight break yields a lower
charge, select this field.
Single Ship. If required, select this field. When selected, the system rates the bill as a single
shipment. This field only applies when the shipment uses a tariff that uses single shipment
charges. The default is to rate the bill as a multiple shipment.
To save your changes, select the green check mark. When you complete the header section, a route
is created in option RT. A service name based on the tariff is also created in option SE. This record
associates the rating with a service.
Note For more information on the fields in the header section, see Chapter 6, “TL/LTL New
Rating Engine,” on page 75.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
104
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Update Rates Tab
On the Update Rates tab, complete the relevant fields for each weight break discount you require.
Fig. 7.5
Header Fields
Rate Basis. Select Flat or Percentage.
SMC. Select the SMC field.
Rate Id. Enter a rate ID, which is the tariff name the service is based on; for example
YFS5001. The rate ID must already exist in the RN table.
From Date, To Date. Enter a valid date range.
Country, Postal Range, City, State. Enter the relevant zone information for the service.
Currency, Cost Code. Complete these mandatory fields.
Discount%. Enter the discount to be applied to the charge. This field is the whole point of
SMC, because the discount is subtracted from the base tariff.
Min Charge Floor. You must enter a minimum charge in this field. A floor is a contractual
minimum charge. If the calculated charge goes below the floor, the system uses the floor rather
than the calculated charge.
Note Ensure that you enter the charge in the Min Charge Floor field and not in the Minimum
field.
From Break, To Break. If you do not enter a weight break, the screen weight break defaults to
0 – 999999. This weight break is then broken down into the standard SMC weight breaks
when rating occurs. When you enter a weight break, it must conform to the SMC standard
weight breaks. For the purpose of deficit rating, you may need to enter discounts for the full
range. SMC has nine standard weight breaks.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
SMC Integration
105
Table 7.4 
SMC Standard Weight Breaks
Break from
Break to
1
0
499
2
500
999
3
1000
1999
4
2000
4999
5
5000
9999
6
10000
19999
7
20000
29999
8
30000
39999
9
40000
When you have completed the fields, click the Save button. If you did not enter a value in the MC
Discount field in the header, a message is displayed when you click Save after completing the first
record. It asks whether to apply the discount rate from the Discount% field to the MC Discount
header field.
When you complete the Update Rates tab, other records are created in the database.
• The RN database table stores LTL/TL rate definitions. These rate definitions are created when
you save the record.
• The tariff name that the service is discounted from is created in SE and associated with the
service. The tariff name has a sequence number of 3 and is marked as a temporary calculation,
which indicates that this record is an SMC Integration record.
Note For more information on the Update Rates tab fields, see Chapter 6, “TL/LTL New Rating
Engine,” on page 75
Configuring Accessorials
Surcharges are not calculated by the SMC RWXL software. The PRECISION rating engine
calculates any accessorials using the net freight cost returned from SMC.
For details of the Accessorials tab in option RM, see Chapter 6, “TL/LTL New Rating Engine,” on
page 75.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
106
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Importing SMC Services and Rates
Use the LMTFM2 and LTLRT2 options to load the services and the relevant discount rate lines.
The LMTFM2 option allows you to format a file to the correct format for upload to PRECISION.
The LTLRT2 option allows you to upload the formatted file.
Changing Files to LTL/TL Rates File Format
Generally, carriers supply rates in Excel files. If the LTL rates files provided by the carrier are not
in the specified format, you must map the columns in the Excel file to the required format. Use
LTLFM2 to edit the file, as displayed in Figure 7.6. You must map the minimum charge to the
value in the Min Charge Floor field.
When you have completed the fields, click the green check mark. This step produces a text file that
is correctly formatted for upload.
Fig. 7.6
LTLFM2
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
SMC Integration
Loading Files in LTL/TL Rates File Format
To load the formatted LTL CSV file into the database, use the LTLRT2 option, as displayed in
Figure 7.7. Complete the following fields:
Service based on SMC integration. Select this field.
Rate basis. Select Flat or Percentage.
Cost Code. Enter FRT or the relevant freight cost code.
Fig. 7.7
LTLRT2
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
107
108
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Troubleshooting
Error Code System Values
If the SMC integration fails for a particular shipment, SMC RWXL software has a list of error
codes that can be returned in the XML response to the LTL rating engine. An explanation of these
error codes is stored in system values, as displayed in Table 7.5.
Table 7.5 
Error Code System Values
Category
Key
Value
LTL
SMC: ERROR CODE - [error code number]
[message]
For example:
For example:
SMC: ERROR CODE – 10
Invalid origin postal code. Please
ensure the postal code is correct.
Debug Files
To help you debug any errors you find, you can produce debug XML files. The XML files contain
details of your request to SMC and the response. If either of the following conditions is met, debug
files are created and saved to your temp folder:
• The LTL category system value SMC: SAVE XML FILES is set to yes.
• Debug mode is set to yes.
XML Request
The naming convention of the file is Shipment Number-Date/time stamp-smc-request.xml; for
example, 0104170-201101121204-smc-request.xml.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
SMC Integration
Fig. 7.8
XML Request to SMC
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
109
110
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
XML Response
The naming convention of this file is Shipment Number-Date/time stamp-smc-response.xml; for
example, 0104170-201101121204-smc-response.xml.
Fig. 7.9
XML Response from SMC
The freight value for the shipment is stored in the totalcharge field on the response xml.
Note Some troubleshooting scenarios are described in the QAD Transportation Management
forum.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
SMC Integration
111
Sample Setup
Figure 7.10 displays an Excel file to upload into Precision. The rates are for two services named
UPGFSMCU and UPGFSMCU. To begin, save the Excel file as a CSV file.
Fig. 7.10
Excel File for Upload
Next, format the file using the LTLFM2 option, as displayed in Figure 7.11.
Fig. 7.11
Converting to Text File
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
112
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
After you format the file, you can upload the file using the option LTLRT2. Complete the fields
and click the green check mark to begin processing. After the file is uploaded, the message in
Figure 7.12 is displayed.
Fig. 7.12
Upload File
The upload also creates SE records for the two services, UPFGSMCU and UPFGSMCC, as
displayed in Figure 7.13. Service/Rating Association sub-options are also created, as displayed in
Figure 7.14 and Figure 7.15.
Fig. 7.13
SE Records Created on Upload
Fig. 7.14
UPGFSMCC Service/Rating Association
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
SMC Integration
Fig. 7.15
UPGFSMCU Service/Rating Association
In addition, an RN record is added. The record contains all rating ID information, including
calculations, axes, regions, and zones. Now, you can update the RM records, as displayed in
Figure 7.16 and Figure 7.17.
Fig. 7.16
RM Rates
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
113
114
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 7.17
RM Rates
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 8
Discounts and Uplifts
This section describes how to configure TL/LTL carriers.
116
Describes the high-level steps involved in configuring TL/LTL carriers.
Overview
116
Configure discounts or uplifts on calculated rates.
Rating Discounts and Uplifts
116
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
For PRECISION network and TL/LTL carriers, the freight rates uploaded into PRECISION are
not always the rates that apply to the shipper or customer. Discounts or uplifts can apply to the
rates calculated from the Charge Table.
Rating Discounts and Uplifts
When freight rates are calculated for a shipment from a Charge Table, a discount or uplift can then
be applied to the service. This scenario occurs in a number of situations.
Example The shipper applies an uplift to the calculated freight because the shipper wants to
make a profit on the freight. Rather than pass on their full rate discount benefit to the customer, the
shipper chooses to uplift the freight by a percentage. The customer still gets cheaper freight
because of the shipper freight deal with the carrier.
Example The shipper has negotiated rates with multiple carriers. Each carrier uses a base set of
freight rates. The carriers then provide different discounts on the base set of rates, depending on
where the carrier is delivering the goods. The shipper can configure one Charge Table with the
base set of rates and then configure separate discounts for each service. Each service-based
discount represents the percentage discount applicable to the base rate.
Creating System Values for Freight Discounts and Uplifts
Use the hierarchy/precedence system values in Table 8.1 for configuration. You can configure the
discount or uplift for a specific Service and Packing Location, specific Carrier and Packing
Location, or more generic configuration across all Packing Locations or across all Services.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Discounts and Uplifts
117
Table 8.1 
Freight Discount/Uplift Configuration
Category
Key
Value
SPS
FRT UPLIFT: xxxx – yyy
[Uplift Detail-1]|[Uplift Detail-2]|
Discount/uplift for a chosen service
and Packing Location.
• xxxx is the service in option RT.
• yyy is the Packing Location. The
shipper may use the same set of
rates for multiple Packing
Locations, but choose to have
different discounts, or uplifts, per
Packing Location.
Each [Uplift Detail] entry can contain:
Example:
FRT UPLIFT: RTTEST1 – ABC
The system value key for a freight
uplift/discount for service RTTEST1
and Packing Location ABC.
SPS
FRT UPLIFT: CARR: xxxx - yyy
[Uplift Detail-1]|[Uplift Detail-2]|
Discount/uplift for a chosen carrier
and Packing Location.
• xxxx is the global carrier.
• yyy is the Packing Location. The
shipper may use the same set of
rates for multiple Packing
Locations, but choose to have
different discounts, or uplifts, per
Packing Location.
Each [Uplift Detail] entry can contain:
Example:
FRT UPLIFT: CARR: UPS – ABC
The system value key for a generic
freight uplift/discount for carrier UPS
and Packing Location ABC.
SPS
CTRY:Country Code(s);STATE:State
Code(s);POSTAL:Postal Code(s);CARRIERDISC:Carrier
Percent;CARRIERFIXED:Carrier Fixed
Value;CARRIERMIN:Carrier Minimum;
CARRIERCOSTTYPE: Carrier Cost Type(s);
CARRIERCOSTCODE:Carrier Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERDISC:Customer
Percent;CUSTOMERFIXED:Customer Fixed
Value;CUSTOMERMIN:Customer Minimum;
CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:Customer Cost
Type(s);CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:Customer Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:[yes/no]
CTRY:Country Code(s);STATE:State
Code(s);POSTAL:Postal Code(s);CARRIERDISC:Carrier
Percent;CARRIERFIXED:Carrier Fixed
Value;CARRIERMIN:Carrier Minimum;
CARRIERCOSTTYPE: Carrier Cost Type(s);
CARRIERCOSTCODE:Carrier Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERDISC:Customer
Percent;CUSTOMERFIXED:Customer Fixed
Value;CUSTOMERMIN:Customer Minimum;
CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:Customer Cost
Type(s);CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:Customer Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:[yes/no]
FRT UPLIFT: xxxx
[Uplift Detail-1]|[Uplift Detail-2]|
Discount/uplift for a chosen Service
across all Packing Locations.
• xxxx is the service in option RT.
Each [Uplift Detail] entry can contain:
Example:
FRT UPLIFT: RTTEST2
The system value key for a generic
freight uplift/discount for service
RTTEST2.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
CTRY:Country Code(s);STATE:State
Code(s);POSTAL:Postal Code(s);CARRIERDISC:Carrier
Percent;CARRIERFIXED:Carrier Fixed
Value;CARRIERMIN:Carrier Minimum;
CARRIERCOSTTYPE: Carrier Cost Type(s);
CARRIERCOSTCODE:Carrier Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERDISC:Customer
Percent;CUSTOMERFIXED:Customer Fixed
Value;CUSTOMERMIN:Customer Minimum;
CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:Customer Cost
Type(s);CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:Customer Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:[yes/no]
118
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Value
SPS
FRT UPLIFT: CARR: xxxx
[Uplift Detail-1]|[Uplift Detail-2]|
Discount/uplift for a chosen carrier
across all packing locations.
• xxxx is the global carrier.
Each [Uplift Detail] entry can contain:
Example:
FRT UPLIFT: CARR: FEDEX
The system value key for a generic
freight uplift/discount for carrier
FEDEX.
SPS
FRT UPLIFT: ALL – yyy
[Uplift Detail-1]|[Uplift Detail-2]|
Discount/uplift for all services.
• yyy is the Packing Location. The
shipper may use the same set of
rates for multiple Packing
Locations, but choose to have
different discounts, or uplifts, per
Packing Location.
Each [Uplift Detail] entry can contain:
Example:
FRT UPLIFT: ALL – ABC
The system value key for a freight
uplift/discount for all services for
Packing Location ABC.
SPS
CTRY:Country Code(s);STATE:State
Code(s);POSTAL:Postal Code(s);CARRIERDISC:Carrier
Percent;CARRIERFIXED:Carrier Fixed
Value;CARRIERMIN:Carrier Minimum;
CARRIERCOSTTYPE: Carrier Cost Type(s);
CARRIERCOSTCODE:Carrier Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERDISC:Customer
Percent;CUSTOMERFIXED:Customer Fixed
Value;CUSTOMERMIN:Customer Minimum;
CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:Customer Cost
Type(s);CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:Customer Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:[yes/no]
CTRY:Country Code(s);STATE:State
Code(s);POSTAL:Postal Code(s);CARRIERDISC:Carrier
Percent;CARRIERFIXED:Carrier Fixed
Value;CARRIERMIN:Carrier Minimum;
CARRIERCOSTTYPE: Carrier Cost Type(s);
CARRIERCOSTCODE:Carrier Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERDISC:Customer
Percent;CUSTOMERFIXED:Customer Fixed
Value;CUSTOMERMIN:Customer Minimum;
CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:Customer Cost
Type(s);CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:Customer Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:[yes/no]
FRT UPLIFT: ALL
[Uplift Detail-1]|[Uplift Detail-2]|
Discount/uplift for all Packing
Locations.
Each [Uplift Detail] entry can contain:
CTRY:Country Code(s);STATE:State
This is the system value key for a
Code(s);POSTAL:Postal Code(s);CARRIERDISC:Carrier
freight uplift/discount for all services. Percent;CARRIERFIXED:Carrier Fixed
Value;CARRIERMIN:Carrier Minimum;
CARRIERCOSTTYPE: Carrier Cost Type(s);
CARRIERCOSTCODE:Carrier Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERDISC:Customer
Percent;CUSTOMERFIXED:Customer Fixed
Value;CUSTOMERMIN:Customer Minimum;
CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:Customer Cost
Type(s);CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:Customer Cost Code(s);
CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:[yes/no]
Note A shipper configures freight uplift system values per Packing Location, and also a system
value with no Packing Location for the same Service. In this case, the system value with the
Packing Location takes precedence when that is the Packing Location on the shipment being rated.
The freight uplift/discount might apply at different levels for a particular service. Levels include:
• Country
• State
• Postal Code range
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Discounts and Uplifts
119
• General/All
Each [Uplift Detail] section is made up of subsections that determine the rules that apply to the
freight uplift/discount percentage. These subsections are not mandatory, so an [Uplift Detail]
section can contain some or all subsections, as in Table 8.2. Each of these subsections is separated
by a semicolon. The subsections are:
• CTRY:Country Code(s) identifies a set of countries for which the rule applies. Enter a comma-
separated list of ISO country codes.
• STATE:State Code(s) identifies a set of state codes within the countries identified in the
previous subsection rule. Enter a comma-separated list.
• POSTAL:Postal Code(s) identifies a set of postal codes, or postal code ranges, within the
countries identified in a previous subsection rule. Enter a postal code or postal code range in a
comma-separated list. Each range is divided by a minus character (-).
• CARRIERDISC:Carrier % identifies the uplift/discount percentage to apply to the base freight
rate, based on the discount/uplift that the carrier applies to the base rate. For discounts, the
value must be negative.
• CARRIERFIXED:Carrier Fixed identifies the fixed value uplift to apply to the base freight
rate, based on the fixed value uplift/discount that the carrier applies to the base rate. For
discounts, the value must be negative. Fixed value is applied after the percentage, if any.
• CARRIERMIN:Carrier Min identifies the minimum charge value to be applied to the
calculated freight rate—after applying both or either of Carrier % and Carrier Fixed—when
the calculated value falls below a minimum specified by the carrier.
• CARRIERCOSTTYPE:Carrier Cost Type(s) identifies the cost types to which the
discount/uplift is applied for the carrier charges. These cost types can be specified from a list
of prescribed values for different cost types contained in Black Box Guide - 901 - Message
Field Lookups.xls. If no cost types are specified, the default is to uplift/discount FREIGHT and
FUEL cost types.
• CARRIERCOSTCODE:Carrier Cost Codes(s) identifies the cost codes to which the discount
or uplift is applied for the carrier charges. When a specific set of cost codes specified in option
CH must be uplifted/discounted, this value is used.
• CUSTOMERDISC:Customer % identifies the discount/uplift percentage to apply to the base
freight rate based on the discount/uplift that the shipper applies to the base rate when charging
the customer. For discounts, the value must be negative.
• CUSTOMERFIXED:Customer Fixed identifies the fixed value uplift to apply to the base
freight rate, based on the fixed value discount/uplift that the shipper applies to the base rate
when charging the customer. For discounts, the value must be negative. Fixed value is applied
after the percentage, if any.
• CUSTOMERMIN:Customer Min identifies the minimum charge value to apply to the
calculated freight rate—after applying both or either of Customer % and Customer Fixed—
when the calculated value falls below a minimum that the carrier specified.
• CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:Customer Cost Type(s) identifies the cost types to which the
discount/uplift is applied for the customer charges. These cost types can be specified from a
list of prescribed values for different cost types contained in Black Box Guide - 901 - Message
Field Lookups.xls. If no cost types are specified, the default is to uplift/discount FREIGHT and
FUEL cost types.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
120
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
• CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:Customer Cost Codes(s) identifies the cost codes to which the
discount/uplift is applied for the customer charges. When a specific set of cost codes specified
in option CH must be uplifted/discounted, this value is used.
• CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:[yes/no] determines whether the customer charge is to
be calculated as an uplift/discount applied to the already calculated carrier charge value; for
example, CUSTOMERUSESCARRIERVALUE:YES.
Note To make the rules more readable, split the [Uplift Detail] sections across lines using a
carriage-return.
Table 8.2 Examples of Configuration for Freight Discount/Uplifts
Category
Key
Value
SPS
CTRY:US;
FRT UPLIFT:
RTTEST1 – ABC STATE:CA,KS,CO;
CARRIERDISC:-25|
CTRY:US;
POSTAL:90210-90299,90400;
CARRIERDISC:-15;
CARRIERFIXED:-1|
CTRY:US;
CARRIERDISC:-10|
CARRIERDISC:-8;
CARRIERMIN:49
Rules
For the RTTEST1 service and Packing
Location ABC:
• 25% carrier discount for states CA, KS
and CO for country US
• 15% carrier discount and a subsequent
$1 discount, for postal codes 90210 90299 and for postal code 90400 for
country US.
• 10% carrier discount for country US for
other states or postal codes.
• 8% carrier discount otherwise.
• $49 minimum charge to apply when
discounted/uplifted charge is less than
$49.
• If an [Uplift Detail] entry in a general
unconditioned rule contains an element
in the rules subsections not found in an
earlier conditioned rule, this element is
also applied to the conditioned rule. In
this example, the minimum charge of
$49 from the general rule is applied to
all more specific rules because no
specific rule includes a CARRIERMIN
element.
SPS
FRT UPLIFT:
RTTEST2
CUSTOMERDISC:10;
CUSTOMERCOSTTYPE:FREI
GHT,EXTENDEDAREA
For the RTTEST2 service and all Packing
Locations, unless there is a system value
with higher precedence specified:
• 10% uplift to the charge applied by the
shipper to the customer. This uplift is
only applied to cost types of type
FREIGHT and EXTENDEDAREA.
SPS
FRT UPLIFT:
RTTEST3
CUSTOMERDISC:8;
CUSTOMERCOSTCODE:QFR
T,QMULTI
For the RTTEST3 service and all Packing
Locations, unless there is a system value
with higher precedence specified:
• 8% uplift to the charge applied by the
shipper to the customer. This uplift is
only be applied to costs of code QFRT
and QMULTI.
SPS
FRT UPLIFT:
RTTEST2
10
The system value represents a
discount/uplift to a customer.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Discounts and Uplifts
121
Precedence for Freight Discount and Uplifts
The discounts/uplifts are applied in the following order of precedence:
1
Service + Packing Location
2
Carrier + Packing Location
3
Service
4
Carrier
5
ALL + Packing Location
6
ALL
The discounts/uplifts have the following precedence within the system value rules configuration:
1
Postal codes
2
States
3
Country
4
General
The individual element of the rules within system values take precedence, rather than the whole
system value.
Example When there is no applicable customer discount in the Service + Packing Location
system value, the system searches for an applicable customer discount in the Service system value.
When no applicable discount is found there, the system searches in ALL + Packing Location, and
so on.
Table 8.3 
Examples of Precedence for Freight Discounts/Uplifts
System
Value
No.
Category
1
SPS
Key
Value
Rules
FRT
UPLIFT:
RTTEST1 –
ABC
CTRY:US;STATE:CA,KS,CO;
CARRIERDISC:-25|
For the RTTEST1 service and Packing
Location ABC:
• 25% carrier discount for states CA,
KS and CO for country US.
• 10% carrier discount for country
US for any other state.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
CTRY:US;CARRIERDISC:-10
122
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
System
Value
No.
Category
2
SPS
Key
Value
Rules
FRT
UPLIFT:
RTTEST1
CTRY:US;STATE:CA,KS,CO;
CARRIERDISC:-22|
For RTTEST1 service and any
Packing Location:
• 22% carrier discount for states CA,
KS and CO for country US.
• 15% carrier discount for postal
codes 60661 for country US.
• 5% carrier discount for country US
for other states or postal codes.
• 7% customer discount regardless
of destination.
CTRY:US;POSTAL:60661;
CARRIERDISC:-15|
CTRY:US;CARRIERDISC:-5|
CUSTOMERDISC:-7|
3
SPS
FRT
UPLIFT:
ALL
CARRIERDISC:-17|
CUSTOMERDISC:-5|
For any service and any Packing
Location:
• Carrier discount is 17% regardless
of destination when no higher
precedence discount is found.
• Customer discount of 5%
regardless of destination when no
higher precedence discount is
found.
Using Table 8.3 and given the following shipments, discounts are calculated as follows:
• A shipment to postal code 90210 in state CA of country US for Packing Location ABC.
• Using the first rule of System Value No.1, carrier discount is 25%.
• Using the second rule of System Value No.3, customer discount is 5%.
Note System Value No.2 does not apply because the more specific value Service + Packing
Location applies.
• A shipment to postal code 60661 in state IL of country US for Packing Location ABC.
• Using the second rule of System Value No.1, carrier discount is 10% through the second
rule of System Value No.1.
• Customer discount is 5% through the second rule of System Value No.3.
Note System Value No.2 does not apply because the more specific value Service + Packing
Location applies.
• Shipment to postal code to country IE for Packing Location ABC.
• Carrier discount is 17% through the first rule of System Value No.3.
• Customer discount is 5% through the second rule of System Value No.3.
• Shipment to postal code 90210 in state CA of country US for Packing Location DEF
• Carrier discount is 22% through the first rule of System Value No.2.
• Customer discount is 7% through the fourth rule of System Value No.2.
Note System Value No.3 does not apply because the more specific system value Service
applies.
• Shipment to postal code 60661 in state IL of country US for Packing Location DEF
• Carrier discount is 15% through the second rule of System Value No.2.
• Customer discount is 7% through the fourth rule of System Value No.2.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Discounts and Uplifts
123
Freight Discounts or Uplifts and Cost Types
Freight discounts/uplifts only apply to costs specified in the system value, or to the default cost
types—freight and fuel—when no cost types are specified. The type of a cost is determined by a
setting in option CH, as displayed in Figure 8.1 and Figure 8.2.
The Charge/revenues section enables you to specify that the cost is of type Freight or Fuel
Surcharge. If the service type is set to None, a cost is of type Freight. Minimum charges only apply
to Freight cost types. On the Shipment Charges record in PRECISION—the XMSOVR0 table—
the customer charge field is SOEVAL and the carrier charge field is SOSEVAL.
Fig. 8.1
CH Option
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
124
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 8.2
Charge/revenues Update
Freight Discount or Uplifts - Ensuring Customer is not Discounted too Far
If a freight discount is set up that results in the customer receiving a cost value of less than the
carrier value, the shipper is passing on too much discount to the customer. To avoid making a loss,
there is a system value to indicate that carrier value is applied as a minimum charge when the
customer value is less than the carrier value.
Table 8.4 
Freight Discount
Category
Key
Value
SPS
FRT UPLIFT: APPLY CARR AS MIN
YES or NO - The default is no.
Freight Discount or Uplifts and Fuel Calculation
It is possible to calculate a fuel surcharge by creating a system value with the naming convention
FUEL UPLIFT instead of FRT UPLIFT. This key applies for all the system values in the tables
shown above. This system value creates a charge record with the cost type QFUELS.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 9
TL/LTL Labeling and Tracking
Numbers
This section describes how to configure TL/LTL carrier codes, labeling, and tracking number
generation.
Overview
126
Describes the functionality of a fully configured TL/LTL service.
126
Create global carrier codes in PRECISION.
Carrier Component
Labeling Component
127
Configure labeling for a carrier.
129
Configure tracking numbers for a carrier.
Tracking Number Component
Service Manifesting Component
134
Configure a manifest for carrier shipments.
126
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
After you configure rates and services, you can complete the configuration of non-integrated
carrier services to:
• Create carrier codes.
• Generate tracking numbers.
• Print standard labels.
• Print EOD manifests.
Carrier Component
To configure system values for the carrier used for a service or services, the carrier must have a
Global Carrier Code that links the related system values. The Global Carrier Code uniquely
identifies the carrier within PRECISION for the purposes of EOD processing, label processing,
and tracking number generation. Typically, the Global Carrier Code is a prefix for all system
values that apply to that carrier. For example, in Table 9.1, the Carrier Partner code 38932211
translates to a Global Carrier Code of RDWY.
Table 9.1 
Global Carrier Code
Category
Key
SPS
GLOBAL CARRIER FOR xxxxxxxx Global Carrier Code, preferably limited to 4 characters.
For example:
Value
For example: RDWY
GLOBAL CARRIER FOR 38932211
Note It is recommended that you use the Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC) as the naming
convention for the Global Carrier Code for a carrier. This way, naming conventions are consistent
and maintenance is easier.
To ensure that Global Carrier Code is compliant with the rating, labeling, and EOD engines within
PRECISION, configure the system value in Table 9.2.
Table 9.2 
Carrier Contact Type
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: CARRIER
CONTACT TYPE
Carrier contact type to identify carrier accounts for this
carrier, held within a sub-option of Partner records in
PRECISION. This value can be blank.
Carrier Configuration Permutations
It is possible to configure carriers differently, based on the labeling, rating, and tracking number
requirements for the carrier. The following outlines how each of the following could be
configured.
• Rate, Tracking Numbers, Print Label
• Rate, Tracking Numbers, Don’t Print Label
• Rate, No Tracking Numbers, Print Label.
• Rate, No Tracking Numbers, Don’t Print Label
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Labeling and Tracking Numbers
127
Labeling Component
This section shows you how to configure functionality to print generic carrier labels in
PRECISION.
If the carrier is a rating carrier only, the generic carrier shipping program checks whether or not the
label is to be printed. The default is to print the label for carriers as soon as the rating is
successfully completed and the tracking number is generated.
Fig. 9.1
Generic Label
Switching On Label Printing
If generic carrier labels are required for the carrier, you must configure a system value.
Table 9.3 
Switch on Label Printing
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: PRINT LTL LABEL
YES or NO.
If YES, the LTL label print program is called.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
128
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Configuring the Number of Labels to Print
Control the number of generic carrier labels to print using the following system values:
Table 9.4 
Switch on Label Printing
Category
Key
Value
SPS
PRINT-LABEL-PERPACK
YES or NO.
PRINT-NUMBERLABELS-PER-PACK
[number of labels].
SPS
Determines whether a label prints for each pack on the shipment, or
one label prints for the whole shipment.
Determines the number of labels printed for each pack when PRINTLABEL-PER-PACK is set to YES.
Determining the Label
You can configure which label—a document in option DO—is printed as a generic carrier label.
Table 9.5 
Assign Document as Label
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]:
LABEL DOMESTIC
[Document Type],[Document Reference].
Determines the document type and reference to use for printing the
label.
If the system value in Table 9.5 does not exist, the system uses a more generic system value:
Table 9.6 
Assign Document as Label - Alternative System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
LTL: LABEL DOMESTIC
[Document Type],[Document Reference].
Determines the document type and reference to use for printing the
label.
If neither of these system values exists, the following document is used:
• Document Type: 57
• Document Ref: LTL_LABEL
The label document type or reference specified must also have a corresponding document with a
document reference ending with 2. One document is used for printing interactively—a reprint of
the label; the other document is used for printing non-interactively—when a shipment is rated and
the label is automatically printed.
Example For LTL_LABEL document, there is a corresponding LTL_LABEL2 for interactive
printing.
When configuring a nonstandard LTL_LABEL document in DO option, write:
• A non-interactive label program based on XTD_LTL.P.
• An interactive label program based on XTD_LTL2.P, which calls the non-interactive label
program.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Labeling and Tracking Numbers
129
Service Description
The description of the carrier service on the label is determined by the system value in Table 9.7.
Table 9.7 
Carrier Service Label Description - System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: LABEL [Text to print]
DESC: [Service Code] where the
[Service Code] is the name of the
service in option RT.
If this system value does not exist, the description output on the label is taken from:
Table 9.8 
Carrier Service Label Description - Alternative System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: GLOBAL [Text to print].
DESCRIPTION
If these system values are not set, the description output is the Global Carrier Code.
Tracking Number Component
This section covers the configuration of tracking numbers when they need to be generated within
PRECISION. Tracking numbers are stored in the following fields:
• Each tracking number is stored on each pack record (XMSXPK0) in the
XMSXPK0.SXTRKNO field.
• The lead tracking number is also stored in the House Air Waybill (HAWB) field
(XMSHDR0.SHHAWB).
The standard generic carrier engine program makes a call to a sub-program (XTLTLSH2.P). This
sub-program generates the tracking numbers and returns a comma-separated list of tracking
numbers—one per package record—to the standard generic carrier engine program. The tracking
numbers are updated onto the pack records and the lead tracking number is updated onto the
shipment header HAWB field.
By default, the same tracking number is returned for each package. It is possible to code an
override of this logic in XTLTLSH2.P, so that a unique tracking number is returned for each
package.
Generating Tracking Numbers
If tracking numbers are not required for the carrier, configure one of the following system values:
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
130
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Table 9.9 
Generate Tracking Numbers
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: RATING
CARRIER ONLY
YES or NO.
If the value is YES, no attempt is made to generate
tracking numbers.
For example:
RDWY: RATING CARRIER ONLY
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO
CREATE – [Packing Location]
YES or NO.
For example:
RDWY: TRK NO CREATE – ABC
If the value is YES, no attempt is made to generate
tracking numbers. YES is the default value when this
system value does not exist.
Generating Check Digits
If check digits are not required for the carrier, configure the system value in Table 9.10.
Table 9.10 
Generate Check Digits
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO YES or NO.
CHK – [Packing Location]
If the value is YES, no attempt is made to generate check digits
For example:
for this carrier for this Packing Location. YES is the default
RDWY: TRK NO CHK – ABC value. If the system value does not exist and a check digit
algorithm exists for the carrier, a check digit is calculated and
appended to the generated tracking number.
Configuring Tracking Number Ranges
To configure the tracking number range for a carrier, the system values in Table 9.11 are required.
Table 9.11 
Configuring Tracking Number Ranges
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO
NEXT – [Packing Location]
The next sequence number to use from the allocated
range.
For example:
For example:
RDWY: TRK NO NEXT – ABC
342
The next tracking number sequence for Global Carrier
Code RDWY for Packing Location ABC is 342.
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO
MAX – [Packing Location]
The maximum sequence number allowed in the allocated
range.
For example:
For example:
RDWY: TRK NO MAX – ABC
500
When the tracking number sequence reaches 500 for
Global Carrier Code RDWY for Packing Location ABC,
the tracking number range expires and a new range must
be configured.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Labeling and Tracking Numbers
131
Allowing Multiple Locations to Use a Single Tracking Range
You can configure multiple Packing Locations—located physically at the same site—to use the
same tracking number range using the following system value:
Table 9.12 
Configuring Tracking Number Ranges - Example
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO
LOCN – [Packing Location]
[The name of the Packing Location against which the
range is configured].
RDWY: TRK NO LOCN – ABC
XYZ
RDWY: TRK NO LOCN – DEK
XYZ
ABC and DEF Packing Locations use the tracking number
range and formatting configured against Packing Location
XYZ.
Tracking Number Range Expiry Warnings
For more information about monitoring the expiry of tracking number ranges, see Topic 029 System Values.xls on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|
PRECISION Reference Guides|Appendices.
Configuring Tracking Number Format
Configure the format of tracking numbers using either of these system values:
Table 9.13 
Configuring Tracking Number Format
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO FMT The formatting of the tracking number.
– [Packing Location]
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO FMT The formatting of the tracking number.
The formatting of the tracking number is managed as follows:
• The character 9 represents a tracking sequence digit unless it is part of a prefix character set.
• The period and minus characters are not interpreted as prefix characters. Instead, they are used
as separators for the digits of the tracking sequence.
• All other characters represent themselves and are interpreted as prefix characters.
The prefix characters are a fixed set of characters at the beginning of the tracking number. They do
not change from one tracking number to the next. The tracking number format is read from right to
left. Until a prefix character is found, all 9 characters are interpreted as digits. After the first prefix
character is found, any subsequent 9 is interpreted as a prefix character.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
132
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Table 9.14 
Tracking Number Format Examples
Category
Key
SPS
RDWY: 
DEF99-99-9999
TRK NO FMT – ABC
Value
Explanation
If the next tracking number sequence is 244, the
tracking number generated is DEF00-00-0244.
The 9 characters are tracking number sequence
digits. The DEF is the prefix character set. The minus
characters are delimiters of the sequence number. If
the next tracking number sequence is 8922033, the
tracking number generated is DEF08-92-2033.
SPS
RDWY: 
DEF9Z-F9-9999
TRK NO FMT – ABC
If the next tracking number sequence is 244, the
tracking number generated is DEF9Z-F0-0244.
The 9 characters are tracking number sequence
formatting. The DEF9Z-F is the prefix character set.
The minus characters are delimiters of the sequence
number.
Configuring a Tracking Number Prefix Explicitly
It is also possible to set up an explicit tracking number prefix, which is maintained outside of the
above tracking number format.
Table 9.15 
Configuring Tracking Number Prefix
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]: TRK NO
PRFX– [Packing Location]
The prefix of the tracking number.
For example:
TT
DTST: TRK NO PRFX – ABC
For carrier DTST for Packing Location ABC, each
tracking number generated is prefixed with the value TT.
For example:
Predefined Tracking Number Formats
Some carriers are loaded with predefined formats in PRECISION. Therefore, if you do not set up
the tracking number format, it defaults from the PRECISION program, depending on the Global
Carrier Code in use.
Note Predefined tracking number formats have been configured within the PRECISION tracking
number generation engine program. For a list of these formats, see Topic 045 - Supported TL-LTL
Carriers.xls on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|PRECISION
Reference Guides|Appendices. If you add a new carrier with no check digit calculation
requirement, and the carrier is not covered in this list, you can still use system values to configure
a tracking number range and format.
Determining Check Digits For Tracking Numbers
If carriers require a check digit calculation for their tracking number, PRECISION has a set of
built-in check digit algorithms for particular carriers. The Global Carrier Code determines the
check digit algorithm to use. If a carrier does not have a check digit requirement, set up the usual
system values for tracking number ranges and formats.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Labeling and Tracking Numbers
133
Note For the list of available Global Carrier Codes for which check digit algorithms are available,
see Topic 045 - Supported TL-LTL Carriers.xls. To requests additional check digit algorithms, log
a Precision Enhancement Request.
PRO Number Consolidations
If the shipper uses the same PRO number for multiple PRECISION shipments going to the same
destination on the same day, configure a system value to allow it.
Table 9.16 
Carrier-level Consolidation
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]:
CONSOLIDATION IN USE
YES or NO.
If the system value does not exist, it defaults to NO.
When set to YES, a note is kept in the database each time
a shipment is processed for this carrier. The note indicates
that any further shipment to this destination using the
same carrier, service type, and Packing Location can use
the same PRO number. The note applies until the EOD is
run for this carrier and Packing Location.
Table 9.17 
Generic Consolidation
Category
Key
Value
SPS
LTL: CONSOLIDATION IN USE
YES or NO.
If the system value does not exist, it defaults to NO.
When set to YES, this system value applies to all TL/LTL
carriers in the system. If you use this consolidation option,
run the EOD to clear out the notes of existing
consolidations for a shipping day.
Additional PRO Number Consolidation Criteria
To reuse PRO numbers across shipments, the shipments must share the same:
• Carrier
• Service
• Packing Location
• Destination address
Use a system value to configure additional criteria that must be shared. Additional criteria also
determine the uniqueness of the consolidation, because the PRO number is only reused across
shipments when they all share the same criteria values.
In Table 9.18, a consolidated PRO number is shared across shipments when the default criteria and
the values in fields XMSHDR0.SHPSL01 and XMSHDR0.SHPSL02 match. If the default criteria
match but the additional consolidation criteria do not, the same PRO number is not used.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
134
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Table 9.18 
Consolidation Criteria
Category
Key
Value
SPS
LTL: CONSOLIDATION FIELDS
Comma-separated list of fields from the shipment header.
For example:
SHPSL01,SHPSL02
Consolidations of PRO Over Multiple Dates
By default, a new PRO number is generated for each new ship date. However, you can configure
the same PRO number to span multiple days when the shipment pickup does not take place until
later in the week. For example, shipments are processed on Monday and no EOD is run. If this
system value is set to NO, the same PRO number can be reused on subsequent days for all
shipments to the same destination until the next EOD is run.
Table 9.19 
Carrier-Level Multiple Date Consolidation
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]:
CONSOLIDATION DAILY
YES or NO.
If the system value does not exist, the default is YES.
Table 9.20 
Generic Multiple Date Consolidation
Category
Key
Value
SPS
LTL: CONSOLIDATION DAILY
YES or NO.
If the system value does not exist, the default is YES.
PRO Number Generation With Failed Charge Determination
If you are shipping COLLECT or THIRD PARTY to a destination, some carriers allow you to
generate a tracking number but not successfully rate the shipment for its destination. You can
allow for this scenario at carrier level by configuring the system value in Table 9.21.
Table 9.21 
Failed Charge Determination
Category
Key
Value
SPS
[Global Carrier Code]:
ALLOW NO RATE COLLECT
YES or NO.
If the system value does not exist, it defaults to NO.
Service Manifesting Component
For the End of Day processing, the carriers are divided into those that are:
• EDI transfer
• Standard manifest
EDI transfer carriers are typically PRECISION network carriers requiring some form of electronic
data communication informing them of shipments being manifested or picked up.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TL/LTL Labeling and Tracking Numbers
135
For TL/LTL carriers, you can create a generic manifest for the driver who collects the packages or
pallets. This manifest contains basic information about the shipments being collected. To produce
this manifest, you must configure a carrier to allow shipments to be batched for manifesting. Use
the system value in Table 9.22.
Table 9.22 
Configure Carrier for Manifest
Category
Key
Value
SPS
STD CARRIER ONLY: [Global
Carrier Code]
YES or NO.
YES makes the carrier available on the list of carriers for
the standard manifest.
For more information on the EOD screen, see Chapter 13, “TMS Menu Options,” on page 209.
Figure 9.2 displays a sample printed manifest.
Fig. 9.2
Standard Manifest Sample
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
136
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 10
Routing Guide
This section describes the Routing Guide.
138
Provides an overview of the Routing Guide.
Routing Guide Overview
138
Provides a description of the Routing Guide screen.
Routing Guide Main Screen
139
Describes how to set up Routing Guide rules in the Web UI.
Routing Guide Rule Screen
154
Illustrates the benefits of rule hierarchies within the Routing Guide.
Branching Logic
157
Describes how to create exclusion rules to exclude particular services based on shipment
characteristics.
Exclusion Rule Logic
157
Describes how to create exception rules for catch-all purposes.
Exception Rule Logic
Automatic Service Assignment and the Routing Guide
158
Describes how Routing Guide rules determine the service that is assigned to a shipment during the
Route Assign task.
161
Explains how Routing Guide rules determine the services that users can choose during rate
shopping.
Rate Shopping and the Routing Guide
162
Explains how to configure the Routing Guide to enable Rate Shopping.
Service Selection Validation and the Routing Guide
Troubleshooting Routing Guide Problems
163
Advises on where to locate troubleshooting information.
138
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Routing Guide Overview
In PRECISION, the Routing Guide enables you to configure rules that allow the user to assign a
particular service to a shipment or to rate shop from a list of available services. Typically, a
Routing Guide is configured for a whole business. The Routing Guide determines which carrier
service to use for shipping from a particular origin. If a business is segregated by country, region,
or product types, you can split the Routing Guide into appropriate sections to handle the different
divisions of the business.
This document describes how to configure Routing Guide rules for use during rate shopping,
service assignment, and service selection validation.
Routing Guide Main Screen
To open the Routing Guide, use the option FRROUT.
Fig. 10.1
Routing Guide Screen
The screen is divided into three areas:
• The Origins area enables you to create, edit, copy, or delete an origin.
• The Packing Locations area displays the Packing Locations at the selected origin. You can
create or delete Packing Locations.
• The Routing Guide Rules area displays the Routing Guide rules associated with the selected
origin. You can create, edit, copy or delete a Routing Guide rule for the associated origin.
Origins
An origin is a set of related Packing Locations that share Routing Guide rules. Therefore,
regardless of the physical location or the type of product, the shipper chooses the service in the
same way. To add a new logical origin to the Routing Guide, click the Edit icon in the Origins
section. The Add Origin pop-up window displays, as shown in Figure 10.2.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
139
Fig. 10.2
Add Origin
Origin. Enter a meaningful code that reflects the purpose of the origin. The code can refer to a
country, region, or other meaningful identifier.
Description. Enter an origin description. Generally, you include the origin code and the name
of the origin. The description is displayed in the Origin Name column in the Origins area. Do
not create an origin with a hyphen in the name because it causes an error in the setup.
Origin Type. This field is not in use; leave it blank.
Specify a unique name for the origin, add a description, and click Create. The new origin appears
in the table.
Packing Locations
A Packing Location is one of the key elements in the Transportation Management System (TMS).
Packing Locations allow you to associate the Routing Guide with a shipment. Each Packing
Location must be associated with an Internal ID. For more details on Packing Locations and
Internal IDs, see Chapter 2, “Packing Locations,” on page 9.
A shipment is shipped from a particular Packing Location. When referencing the Routing Guide,
the shipment is linked with the origins associated with the Packing Location. It is recommended
that a Packing Location be associated with one origin. To associate a Packing Location with the
selected origin, click the Create button in the Packing Locations area.
Fig. 10.3
Add Packing Location
Location. A Packing Location that already exists in the system. To check the available Packing
Locations, use the option LN.
Description. This field is read-only and displays the description of the selected location.
Specify an existing Packing Location and click Create.
Routing Guide Rule Screen
When you create or update a Routing Guide rule, the screen in Figure 10.4 displays.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
140
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 10.4
Routing Guide Rule
The Routing Guide rule header contains fields that determine when a Routing Guide rule can be
compared with a shipment. For more information, see “Routing Guide Rule Header” on page 141.
There are five tabs on this screen. The first two tabs contain criteria that are checked to see
whether the Routing Guide rule applies to a shipment:
• Routing Criteria: Criteria that are compared against the shipment’s attributes to determine
whether the Routing Guide rule applies to the shipment. The content of this tab is not
configurable. For more information, see “Routing Criteria Tab” on page 142.
• Dynamic Criteria: Criteria that are compared against the shipment’s attributes to determine
whether the Routing Guide rule applies to the shipment. The content of this tab is
configurable. You can add fields based on the routing policy of your organization using the
FILTER FIELDS system values. For more information, see “Dynamic Criteria Tab” on
page 149.
The remaining tabs contain information that is assigned to the shipment when the Routing Guide
rule applies to a shipment.
• Routing Assignment: A list of services that are acceptable for the shipment. You can also add
payment method and third party information to the shipment. For more information, see
“Routing Assignment Tab” on page 151.
• Accessorials: Additional services that you want to apply to the shipment. Assignment of these
services is dependent on their compatibility with the carrier service ultimately assigned to the
shipment. For more information, see “Accessorials Tab” on page 153.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
141
• Rule Books: A set of rule books run against the shipment during the service assignment. If you
use this tab, the Routing Assignment and Accessorials tabs must be clear. For more
information, see “Rule Books Tab” on page 154.
Routing Guide Rule Header
The header fields determine when a Routing Guide rule can be compared with a shipment. When
the Routing Guide runs, the header fields of each rule are checked to see whether the rule is valid
at that time. The header fields also allow you to specify other high-level characteristics of a rule
such as whether the rule is an exception rule.
Fig. 10.5
Routing Guide Rule Header Fields
Start Date. The date from which the Routing Guide rule is valid. This date is compared to the
shipment despatch date.
End Date. The date up to which the Routing Guide rule is valid. This date is compared to the
shipment despatch date.
The Start Date and the End Date fields combine to form an effective date range.
• If Start Date is blank and End Date is complete, the effective date range is any date up to
the end date.
• If Start Date is complete and End Date is blank, the effective date range is any date from
the start date.
• If Start Date and End Date are blank, the rule is valid for all dates.
• If Start Date and End Date are complete, the effective date range is valid for all dates in the
range, inclusive of Start Date and End Date. For example, if Start Date is specified as July
1 and End Date as July 31, the rule applies for all of July.
Start Time. The time from which a Routing Guide rule is valid. This field only applies when it
contains a non-zero value. For example, if Start Time contains 18:00, the Routing Guide rule is
checked when the Routing Guide is run from 18:00 on. This time is based on the system time.
End Time. The time from which a Routing Guide rule is no longer valid. This field only
applies when it contains a non-zero value. For example, if End Time contains 23:30, the
Routing Guide rule is checked when the Routing Guide is run before 23:30. This time is based
on the system time.
If Start Time and End Time are complete, the Routing Guide rule is valid for this time range.
Description. Enter a description of the rule for reference purposes.
Applicable For. Specify the days of the week when the Routing Guide rule applies.
Choice Level. Select the blank option from this drop-down menu. The Rulebook option is for
future use.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
142
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Max. Transit Time. The maximum transit time allowed for any service considered as a result of
applying this Routing Guide rule. This condition is applied retrospectively. If a service listed
in the Routing Assignment tab cannot deliver the shipment within the specified tolerance level
for transit time, the service is discounted. Transit time is expressed in days.
Exclusion Rule. Select this field to specify that when the Routing Guide rule applies to the
shipment, any services in the Routing Assignment tab are not considered for the shipment.
This allows you to specify services that you do not want to consider for particular shipments.
For more information, see “Exclusion Rule Logic” on page 157.
Origin Assignment. Select this field when the Routing Guide rule is used for branching logic.
The Routing Guide rule is used to identify other Origin ID records and associated rules that
apply to the shipment. This allows you to build up a rule tree with different levels of Routing
Guide rules. For more details, see “Branching Logic” on page 154.
Exception Rule. Select this field to specify that the Routing Guide rule applies when all other
Routing Guide rules within the Origin ID do not apply. An exception rule has no criteria set
against it. The only condition is that all other Routing Guide rules within the origin are not
applicable. For more details, see “Exception Rule Logic” on page 157.
Routing Criteria Tab
The routing criteria are divided into sections:
• Address Information
• Shipment Weight/Volume
• Pack Weight/Volume
• General Information
• Hazmat
Each section contains fields that correspond to shipment attributes. If the fields contain a value, the
Routing Guide compares the value with the corresponding shipment attribute. If the field is blank,
the corresponding shipment attribute is not considered when determining the Routing Guide rule
that applies to the shipment. For the rule to apply to a shipment, all of the values specified in the
rule must match the corresponding attributes in the shipment.
The shipment attributes are stored in a number of tables:
Table 10.1 
Shipment Attribute Tables
Table Name
Description
XMSHDR0
Shipment header attributes
XMSXPK0
Shipment pack attributes
XMSITM0
Shipment item attributes
XTZSTP0
Shipment type attributes
XMPROD0
Product attributes
Address Information
The fields in the Address Information section are compared with the Customer and Ship To details
of the shipment.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
143
• Include Address: Use these fields to specify shipments that the Routing Guide rule applies to.
For example, to create a Routing Guide rule that applies when shipping to the US, specify US
in the Country field of the Include Address section.
• Exclude Address: Use these fields to specify shipments that the Routing Guide rule does not
apply to. For example, to create a Routing Guide rule that applies when shipping to all
countries apart from the US, specify US in the Country field of the Exclude Address section.
You can combine Include Address criteria with Exclude Address criteria in a single rule. For
example, to create a Routing Guide rule that applies to all shipments to US states apart from
California:
• Specify US in the country field of the Include Address section.
• Specify US in the country field of the Exclude Address section.
• Specify CA in the state field of the Exclude Address section.
Fig. 10.6
Routing Criteria - Address Information
The following fields display in both the Include Address and Exclude Address sections:
Customer. The customer of the shipment.
Ship To. The Ship To party of the shipment.
Ship To Name. The Ship To name, or part of the Ship To name, of the shipment. For example,
if you enter SMITH in this field, it matches both JOHN SMITH and SMITHS OF KANSAS.
Postal Ranges. A comma-separated list of postal code ranges.
Example If this field contains 10300-10399,10800-10899,83110, then the rule refers to
shipments with postal codes that are one of the following:
• Between 10300 and 10399
• Between 10800 and 10899
• 83110
City. A comma-separated list of city names that are listed in option PL. The validation of this
field is not case-sensitive.
State. A comma-separated list of states. The validation of this field is not case-sensitive. The
state codes that you enter here must match the format of state codes that exist in the partner
address book.
Country. A comma-separated list of two-character ISO country codes. The validation of this
field is not case-sensitive.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
144
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Typically, you configure a combination of address fields, such as:
• Country and Postal Ranges.
• Country and State.
• Country and City.
However, some combinations are not allowed because they do not make sense. These
combinations are flagged when you try to include them in the Routing Guide rule. You cannot
combine:
• Multiple countries and a postal code or postal code range.
• Multiple countries and state.
• Multiple countries and cities.
• Multiple states and postal codes. In this case, the postal code has precedence, and state does
not apply.
• Multiple cities and a postal code or postal code range.
Shipment Weight/Volume
This criteria is used to determine whether a Routing Guide rule applies to a shipment based on the
weight or volume of the shipment. You can specify that a rule applies when a shipment weighs less
than 100 kilograms, or when a shipment measures more than 100 cubic centimeters in volume.
Fig. 10.7
Routing Criteria - Shipment Weight/Volume
Ship Weight Min. The minimum shipment weight at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
Ship Weight Max. The maximum shipment weight at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
Shipment weight is determined from the pack weights of the shipment. If there are no packs on
the shipment, the weight is taken from the XMSHDR0.SHGWGT field in the shipment header.
Dimensional weight is not considered for Ship Weight Min and Ship Weight Max, as the
dimensional weight calculation is not consistent across carriers and services.
The lookup field enables you to select the UOM of the values. If the lookup field is empty, the
UOM is the default UOM configured in system values. The overall shipment weight is
converted to this UOM. Then the comparison is made between the converted shipment weight
and the minimum and maximum weight thresholds specified in Ship Weight Min and Ship
Weight Max.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
145
Table 10.2 
Default System UOM for Mass
Category
Key
Description
SYSTEM
UOM - Default MASS
Unit of measure for mass.
Possible values:
Any unit of measure in the option UO, where the
dimension scope is MASS. This is usually set up
during the PRECISION implementation, and is
typically set to lb or Kg.
Ship Volume Min. The minimum shipment volume at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
Ship Volume Max. The maximum shipment volume at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
The shipment volume is determined from the pack volumes on the shipment. If there are no
packs on the shipment, the volume is taken from the volume on the shipment header
XMSHDR0.SHCUBE.
The lookup field enables you to select the UOM of the values used. If the lookup field is
empty, the UOM is the default UOM configured in system values. The overall shipment
volume is converted to this UOM. Then the comparison is made between the converted
shipment volume and the minimum and maximum volume thresholds specified in Shipment
Volume Min and Shipment Volume Max.
Table 10.3 
Default System UOM for Volume
Category
Key
Description
SYSTEM
UOM - Default VOLUME
Unit of measure for volume.
Possible values:
Any unit of measure in the option UO, where the
dimension scope is VOLUME. This is usually set up
during the PRECISION implementation, and is
typically set to FT3 or M3.
Pack Weight/Volume
This criteria is used to determine whether a Routing Guide rule applies based on the weight,
volume or dimensions of every package on the shipment. You can specify that a rule applies when:
each pack in a shipment weighs less than 100 kilograms, or when each pack in a shipment
measures more than 100 cubic centimeters in volume.
Fig. 10.8
Routing Criteria - Pack Weight/Volume
Pack Weight Min. The minimum package weight at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
146
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Pack Weight Max. The maximum package weight at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
Dimensional weight is not considered for Pack Weight Min and Pack Weight Max because the
dimensional weight calculation is not consistent across carriers and services.
The lookup button enables you to choose the weight UOM of the values used. If the field is
empty, the UOM is the default UOM configured in the system value displayed in Table 10.2.
The pack weight of the shipment is converted to this UOM. Then the comparison is made
between the converted pack weight and the minimum and maximum weight thresholds
specified in Pack Weight Min and Pack Weight Max.
Pack Length Min. The minimum package length at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
Pack Length Max. The maximum package length at which the Routing Guide rule applies.
The package length is defined as the length of the longest side on the package.
Pack Length & Girth Min. The minimum package length + girth at which the Routing Guide
rule applies.
Pack Length & Girth Max. The maximum package length + girth at which the Routing Guide
rule applies.
The combination of package length plus package girth is a typical consideration made by
carriers to determine whether a package is an oversize package.
Girth is calculated as follows: Girth = 2 * (Width + Height).
The lookup button enables you to choose the UOM of the values. If the lookup field is empty,
the UOM is the default UOM configured in the system value in Table 10.4. The package
dimensions are converted to this UOM. Then the comparison is made between the converted
package dimensions and the minimum and maximum dimension thresholds specified in Pack
Length Min, Pack Length Max, Pack Length & Girth Min, and Pack Length & Girth Max.
Table 10.4 
Default System UOM for Length
Category
Key
Description
SYSTEM
UOM - Default LENGTH
Unit of measure for length.
Possible values:
Any unit of measure in the option UO, where the
dimension scope is LENGTH. This value is usually
set up during the PRECISION implementation, and
is typically set to IN, FT, CM or M.
Pack Type. The shipment must contain at least one pack of the specified type before the
Routing Guide rule applies. The type of each pack in a shipment is identified by the
corresponding shipment pack field XMSXPK0.SXTYPE.
Min Pack Count. The minimum number of packages that must exist in the shipment for the
Routing Guide rule to apply. The pack count is stored in the shipment header field
XMSHDR0.SHPACK.
Max Pack Count. If the number of packages on the shipment exceeds this value, the Routing
Guide does not apply.
The number of packages is based on the number of outermost packages on the shipment. Child
packages are not considered.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
147
General Information
Use this criteria to determine whether a Routing Guide rule applies to a shipment based on general
attributes of the shipment.
Fig. 10.9
Routing Criteria - General Information
Payment Method. The currently assigned freight payment method, which is stored in
XMSHDR0.SHTERM.
Duty Payment Method. The duty/tax payment method, which is stored in
XMSHDR0.SHDUTYTERM.
Delivery Terms. The delivery terms, which are stored in XMSHDR0.SHDSTR.
Transport Mode. The transport mode, which is stored in XMSHDR0.SHMODE.
Min / Max Distance. The minimum and maximum shipment distances at which the Routing
Guide rule applies. The shipment distance is stored in XMSHDR0.SHPDST. The lookup field
next to the value range enables you to select a UOM for the values. If the lookup field is
empty, the UOM is the default UOM configured in system values. The shipment distance is
converted to this UOM and then the comparison is made between the converted distance and
the minimum and maximum distance specified in Min/Max Distance.
Table 10.5 
Default System UOM for Distance
Category
Key
Description
SYSTEM
UOM - DEFAULT DISTANCE
Unit of measure for distance.
Possible values:
Any unit of measure in the option UO, where the
dimension scope is LENGTH. This value is usually
set up during the PRECISION implementation, and
is typically set to KM or ML.
Min/Max Value. The minimum and maximum shipment values at which the Routing Guide
rule applies. The shipment value is stored in XMSHDR0.SHVALU. The lookup field next to
the range enables you to set the currency. If the currency is not specified, the system currency
is used. The shipment value is converted to this currency, and then the values are compared.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
148
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Table 10.6 
Default System Currency
Category
Key
Description
SYSTEM
DEFAULT CURRENCY
Default system currency.
Possible values:
Any currency in the option CU.
Service. The service assigned to the shipment, which is stored in XMSHDR0.SHROUT.
Carrier. The carrier assigned to the shipment, which is stored in XMSHDR0.SHSHPC.
Freight Class. The freight class of an item line in the shipment. Specify a comma-separated
list of freight classes. If one of the entries in the list matches one of the freight classes on the
shipment item lines, the Routing Guide rule applies. Typically, the Freight Class field is used
for LTL shipments. The freight class of each product in a shipment is identified by the
corresponding shipment item field XMSITM0.SIFCLS.
Product. A product code associated with the shipment. There must be at least one occurrence
of the product code on one shipment item line. The product code of each item line in a
shipment is identified by the corresponding shipment item field XMSITM0.SIPROD.
Shipment Type. The shipment type, which is stored in the shipment header field
XMSHDR0.SHTYPE.
Export. If you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to export shipments only, select Yes.
Similarly, if you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to all shipments that are not for export,
select No. The value in the shipment header field XMSHDR0.SHTYPE is used to find the
master record, XTSZTP0. The field ZSEXP on the master record indicates whether the
shipment is an export shipment.
Import. If you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to import shipments only, select Yes.
Similarly, if you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to all shipments that are not for import,
select No. The value in the shipment header field XMSHDR0.SHTYPE is used to find the
master record, XTSZTP0. The field ZSIMP on the master record indicates whether the
shipment is an import shipment.
Domestic Outbound. If you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to domestic outbound
shipments only, select Yes. Similarly, if you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to all
shipments that are not domestic outbound shipments, select No. The value in the shipment
header field XMSHDR0.SHTYPE is used to find the master record, XTSZTP0. The field
ZSDOUT on the master record indicates whether the shipment is a domestic outbound
shipment.
Domestic Inbound. If you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to domestic inbound
shipments only, select Yes. Similarly, if you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to all
shipments that are not domestic inbound shipments, select No. The value in the shipment
header field XMSHDR0.SHTYPE is used to find the master record, XTSZTP0. The field
ZSDIN on the master record indicates whether the shipment is a domestic inbound shipment.
Hazmat
Use this criteria to determine whether a Routing Guide rule applies based on hazardous material
information.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
149
Fig. 10.10
Routing Criteria: Hazmat
Allow Hazmat. If you want the Routing Guide rule to apply shipments that have hazardous
material in a line item, select Yes. Similarly, if you want the Routing Guide rule to apply to
shipments that do not have hazardous material in a line item, select No. When the field
XMSITM0.SIDGI is set to yes, the product that it contains is hazardous material.
UN Number. The UN Number of a product on the shipment. There must be at least one
occurrence of this UN number on the shipment. The UN number of each item line in a
shipment is identified by the corresponding shipment item field XMSITM0.SICLAS.
Class/Division Number. The hazmat class of a product on the shipment. There must be at least
one occurrence of this hazmat class on the shipment. The shipment item field
XMSITM0.SICLAS is used to identify the UN number table field XMUNNO0.UNCLNO.
SI Number. The SI Number of a product on the shipment. There must be at least one
occurrence of this SI number on the shipment. The shipment item field XMSITM0.SICLAS is
used to identify the UN number table field XMUNNO0.UNSINO.
Sub Risk Class. The sub-risk class of a product on the shipment. There must be at least one
occurrence of this SI number on the shipment. The shipment item field XMSITM0.SICLAS is
used to identify the UN number table field XMUNNO0.UNSUBR.
Dynamic Criteria Tab
Use the Dynamic Criteria tab to specify your own set of criteria to determine when a rule apples to
a shipment.
Fig. 10.11
Dynamic Criteria
The fields on this tab are configured using the FILTER FIELD system values.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
150
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Table 10.7 
Dynamic Criteria Setup
Category
Key
SPSROUTE
FILTER FIELD A set of values in the format Instruction 1|Instruction 2|
<UNIQUE_IDENTIFI Instruction 3.
ER>
Value
Give the <UNIQUE_IDENTIFIER> a name and number that determines the sequence in which
the fields appear in the tab such as FILTER FIELD - Field1VolumeMin. Table 10.8 describes the
possible instructions allowed in the configuration of the system value.
Table 10.8 
Dynamic Filter - Instruction Values
Filter
Format
Possible Values
Table
TABLE=<TABLE_NAME>
XMSHDR0 - Shipment header.
XMSITM0 - Shipment item.
XMSXPK0 - Shipment pack.
XMPROD0 - Product, which is related to the shipment item
through SIPROD.
Field
FIELD=<FIELD_NAME>
The <FIELD_NAME> must occur within the
<TABLE_NAME> specified in the table filter. To find the list
of tables, open the TB option. To find the list of fields for a
table, click the table sub-options link to the left of the table
name, and then click Fields.
Label
LABEL=<LABEL_NAME>
This instruction determines the text that appears before the field
on the Dynamic Criteria tab, and is optional. If you do not
specify the label name, the Routing Guide determines the field
name to display from the field definition. The field definition is
available in the Fields sub-option of the table definition in
option TB.
Operation
OPER=<OPERATION_NAME> MIN - Filter field used as a minimum value.
MAX - Filter field used as a maximum value.
EQUAL - Filter field used for direct comparisons.
LOOKUP - Filter field used for lookup comparisons; a commaseparated list of values that the value can match.
Record
REC=
<RECORD_OCCURRENCE>
ONE - When filtering, require only one record to meet the
condition of the filter field.
This value determines the
ALL - When filtering, require all the specified records to meet
the condition of the filter field.
number of records that are
compared with the user input.
If no REC type is specified, ALL is the default.
This filter is relevant when
checking the values of shipment
items, packs, and products,
because there can be more than
one of each of these records on a
shipment.
Table 10.9 gives examples of how to set up types of filter fields in the Dynamic Criteria tab.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
151
Table 10.9 
Dynamic Filter - Example Configurations
Field Type
Set Up Value
Minimum
Value
To filter based on the minimum value If you enter a value in the Shipment Insurance Min field
of a field:
on the Dynamic Criteria tab, the Routing Guide rule
applies when the XMSHDR0.SHINSV field is greater
TABLE=XMSHDR0|FIELD=
than the specified value.
SHINSV|OPER=MIN
Explanation
Maximum
Value
To filter based on the maximum value If you enter a value in the Shipment Insurance Max field
of a field:
on the Dynamic Criteria tab, the Routing Guide rule
applies when the XMSHDR0.SHINSV field is less than
TABLE=XMSHDR0|FIELD=
the specified value.
SHINSV|OPER=MAX
You can combine the minimum and maximum fields to
specify a particular numerical range. You can do the same
for date-based fields.
Direct
Comparison
Value
To filter based on the field contents
matching a specific value:
Lookup
Comparison
Value
To filter based on the field contents
matching one of a set of values:
A Check
Against a
Multioccurrence
Table
To filter based on a shipment attribute
that can have multiple instances
within a single shipment; for example,
item records, packs, products:
TABLE=XMSHDR0|FIELD=
SHUSR1|OPER=EQUAL
TABLE=XMSHDR0|FIELD=
SHUSR5|OPER=LOOKUP
TABLE=XMPROD0|FIELD=
PRLICR|OPER=EQUAL|REC=ONE
If you enter a value in the User Defined 1 field on the
Dynamic Criteria tab, the Routing Guide rule applies
when the XMSHDR0.SHUSR1 field is equal to the
specified value.
If you enter a set of values in the User Defined 5 field on
the Dynamic Criteria tab, the Routing Guide rule applies
when the XMSHDR0.SHUSR5 field is equal to one of the
specified values.
If you enter a value in the Product License field on the
Dynamic Criteria tab, the Routing Guide rule applies
when the XMPROD0.PRLICR field is equal to the value
specified on at least one XMPROD0 record associated
with the shipment.
Routing Assignment Tab
The Routing Assignment tab is used to specify actions taken when a rule applies to a shipment.
Use this tab to specify the services that are considered or selected for the purposes of:
• Route assignment
• Rate shopping
• Route validation
You can also use this tab to update shipment attributes such as the freight payment method.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
152
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 10.12
Routing Assignment
Services
The Services section consists of a set of services, each with its own associated preference
weighting and freight account. Use this section to add a list of services that are appropriate for
shipments to which this rule applies, and to specify a freight account and duty account.
Service. The service code.
Description. The full name of the service.
Preference. The preference weighting that applies to the service. The preference weighting
can be any number between 0 and 999. The preference weighting is taken into account when
determining the service assigned to a shipment during Route Assignment. For more
information, see “Determining the Preferred Service for the Shipment” on page 159.
Freight Account. The freight account associated with the service. If the freight payment
method is collect, this freight account is billed.
Duty Account. Specifies the duty account associated with the service. The duty account is only
relevant if the duty payment method is Third Party.
General Information
Use this section to assign general information to shipments that this Routing Guide rule applies to.
Payment Method. Freight payment method.
Example When shipping to a particular customer, shipments are billed as collect. Therefore,
Collect is set as the freight payment method.
Duty Payment Method. Duty payment method.
Example When shipping to a particular customer, shipments are to billed as Shipper Pays
Duty + VAT.
COD Method. COD Payment Method.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
153
Example When the freight payment method is COD, the COD Payment Method is Cashiers
Check.
Instructions. Instructions for the shipment, which are stored in the Rating Errors Log for the
shipment and displayed on the Invalid Rates tab of the Rate Shop task.
Inducted Location. You can use the Routing Guide rule to specify the Shipper Account
associated with the Shipment when a particular service is chosen. The Packing Location that
you specify in this field determines the shipper account. For more about Packing Locations,
see Chapter 2, “Packing Locations,” on page 9.
Example A shipper requires zone skipping of shipments. The Shipments are labeled with a
shipping address that differs from the location where they are processed initially. The
shipments are trucked to that shipping address and then handed over to the carrier linked to the
service determined by the Routing Assignment.
Chargeable Service. The chargeable service of the shipment. A shipper can ship with one
method and bill with another method. The rates applied to the customer are based on the
chargeable service.
Insured % Pack Value. The percentage of the package value to apply as an insured value for
the package. This value is used to notify the carrier how much the package is to be insured for
when the service offers insurance as an accessorial.
Third Party Information
If you want to bill a third party for the freight costs of the shipment, use this tab to store the thirdparty details. This information is relevant only when the freight payment method is Third Party.
Name. The name of the third-party company to whom the freight is billed.
Addr1, Addr2, Addr3. If these fields display, then you can use them to enter details of the third-
party address.
City, Postal, State, Country. The address of the third-party company to whom the freight is
billed.
Phone. The contact number of the third-party company to whom the freight is billed.
Dynamic Field Assignment
This section is for future use.
Accessorials Tab
Use this tab to specify a list of accessorials that you want to add to the shipment. The accessorials
you select are applied to a shipment when the Routing Guide rule applies to the shipment.
These accessorials only apply to a shipment when they are available for the selected service.
Adding accessorials to a service may incur a charge in addition to the basic cost of the service.
If the services in the Routing Assignment tab are blank, the Routing Guide rule accessorials apply
to all valid services in the Routing Guide.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
154
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
In Figure 10.13, only the Saturday Delivery field is selected and the Routing Assignment tab is
blank. Therefore, for each possible service found during rate shopping or routing assignment,
Saturday Delivery applies to the shipment.
Note The accessorial is only applied to a service when the service offers that accessorial.
Fig. 10.13
Accessorials Tab
Rule Books Tab
This section is for future use.
Branching Logic
Branching logic allows you to create multiple levels of Routing Guide rules within the Routing
Guide. You can put conditions in place so that a set of Routing Guide rules only applies when it
meets a higher-level condition. You can build a rule tree, where branches of the tree are only
considered when the higher branches meet the routing criteria.
Branching Example
This example describes a hierarchy of Routing Guide rules to deal with shipments that occur
frequently from Packing Location A9901. The shipments are hazardous and the payment type is
COD Amount.
The origin ID for A9901 exists with the Packing Location A9901.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
155
Fig. 10.14
Origin ID A9901
1
The first rule must indicate that the shipment is hazardous. When the shipment is hazardous,
the origin ID A9901HZY applies.
a
In option LN, create an origin ID A9901HZY.
b
To create a Routing Guide rule to point to the origin ID for hazardous shipments, in the
Routing Guide, select origin ID A9901.
c
Create a Routing Guide rule.
d
In the Routing Guide Rule header, select the Origin Assignment field.
e
On the Origin Assignment tab, create A9901HZY as the origin ID.
f
On the Routing Criteria tab, in the Hazmat section, set Allow Hazmat to Yes.
g
Create the rule.
Fig. 10.15
A9901 Hazardous Rule
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
156
2
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
The next rule in the hierarchy must indicate the action to take when the payment type for a
hazardous shipment is COD Amount. For this condition, ID A9901COD is to apply.
a
In option LN, create an origin ID A9901HZY.
b
To create a Routing Guide rule to point to the origin ID for COD Amount payments, in the
Routing Guide, select the origin ID A9901HZY.
c
Create a Routing Guide rule.
d
In the Routing Guide Rule header, select the Origin Assignment field.
e
On the Origin Assignment tab, create A9901COD as the origin ID.
f
On the Dynamic Criteria tab, in the Payment Method field, type COD Amount.
g
Create the rule.
Fig. 10.16
A9901HZY Payment Rule
When the Routing Guide fires for a hazardous shipment with the payment type COD Amount, the
process works as follows:
1
Routing Guide processing begins.
2
When the A9901 Routing Guide rules are checked, the relevant Routing Guide rule determines
that A9901HZY applies.
3
When the A9901HZY Routing Guide rules are checked, the relevant Routing Guide rule
determines that the rule with the Payment Method applies. This rule in turn determines that
A9901COD is applicable.
4
The Routing Guide rules on A9901COD are checked.
This example shows that you can build rules in hierarchies, branching in a different direction
depending on the criteria that are fulfilled.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
157
Exclusion Rule Logic
You can create a rule to exclude some services when the shipment has particular characteristics.
This approach allows the shipper to keep the inclusive rules for services and to block off some
services by using more explicit rules for exclusion.
Exclusion Rule Example
Figure 10.17 displays a Routing Guide rule that excludes any services in the Routing Assignment
tab when the shipment reaches 40 kg in weight.
Fig. 10.17
Exclusion Field
Exception Rule Logic
An exception rule acts as a default when all other rules within an origin ID fail based on their
criteria. Use an exception rule to provide an action to take when no other rules apply. Only one
exception rule is allowed within an origin. This exception rule has no criteria set against it and is
only used when all other rules within an origin fail to fire. To specify that a rule is an exception
rule, select the Exception Rule field in the header of the Routing Guide rule for the associated
origin.
Fig. 10.18
Exception Rule
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
158
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Exception Rule Example
• Rule 1: The shipment is greater than 50 kg and the contents are hazardous.
• Rule 2: The shipment is greater than 50 kg and the contents are non-hazardous.
• Rule 3: An exception rule.
Table 10.10 Applying Rules
Shipment
Rule Applied
55 kg hazardous shipment
Rule 1
55 kg non- hazardous shipment
Rule 2
7 kg hazardous shipment
Rule 3
7 kg non-hazardous shipment
Rule 3
Automatic Service Assignment and the Routing Guide
You can use the Routing Guide to automatically assign a service, along with any other attributes
specified in the Routing Assignment tab, to the shipment. You can configure a Route Assign
Workflow task to assign a service to the shipment. Attach the option as a task to a workflow:
Table 10.11 
Workflow Task
KeyID
BBSRAS50
Task Option
BBSRAS
Task Type
Standard Task
Program Type
Route Assign Shipment - Process Action - Black Box Service
Parameters
If this field is blank, the service is assigned based on the preference weighting allocated
to the services in the Routing Assignment tab of the Routing Guide rule.
However, it is possible to specify additional parameters:
APPLY-REQUIRED-DATE=YES
The service assigned must be within the limits of the shipment Required Delivery
Date/Time.
APPLY-PRIORITY-CHEAPEST=YES
The service assignment applies the cheapest service to the shipment.
APPLY-PRIORITY-FASTEST=YES
The service assignment applies the fastest service to the shipment.
APPLY-PRIORITY-CHEAPESTANDFASTEST
The service assignment searches for the cheapest service available. If there is more than
one service with this cheapest rating, then the fastest of these services is chosen.
APPLY-PRIORITY-CARRIERPERFORMANCE
The service assignment applies the best carrier performance service to the shipment.
APPLY-PRIORITY-CHEAPEST-WITHIN-REQ-DATE-ELSE-FASTEST
The service assignment searches for services that deliver the shipment within the
required delivery date. If there is more than one service in this category, then the
cheapest of these services is chosen. If there are no services in this category, then the
fastest service is chosen.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
159
The task determines which service or services are suitable for the shipment, based on the
configuration of the Routing Guide. Next, the preferred service is assigned to the service, along
with any other attributes specified on the Routing Assignment tab of the applicable Routing Guide
rule.
Determining the Preferred Service for the Shipment
Each Service in the Routing Assignment tab has a particular weighting or preference value
associated with it. The lowest value has the highest preference. This logic can be shown clearly by
means of an example.
Fig. 10.19
Routing Assignment: Service Preferences
In this example:
• Service UPSWW065 has a weighting of 50
• Service UPSWW066 has a weighting of 20
• Service UPSWW067 has a weighting of 10
This means that the order of precedence for these services is as follows:
1
UPSWW067
2
UPSWW066
3
UPSWW065
If you do not assign a preference weighting to the service, the default value of zero applies. This
weight is the lowest weight, and the highest preference. To ensure clarity about preference
weightings, explicitly assign a weight to each service.
If no Routing Guide rules match the characteristics of the shipment, then the Routing Assignment
task fails, and the shipment is not updated.
Note When multiple applicable rules match the characteristics of the shipment, and each service
shares the same highest Preference value, then the system rate shops these services and selects the
cheapest service as the preferred service. If you have set parameters for the BBSRAS task, these
parameters are taken into account when selecting the service; the system does not automatically
select the cheapest service.
Shipment Fields updated during Route Assignment
When the preferred service is determined, the following shipment fields are updated based on the
contents of the Routing Guide tab of the applicable rule:
Service & Carrier. Shipment Service (XMSHDR0.SHROUT), and Shipment Carrier partner
(XMSHDR0.SHSHPC). The carrier is associated with the service through the RT option.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
160
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Billable Account. Billable Carrier Account (XMS2DR0.S2TPACC) to which the freight is
billed. This field applies if the Freight Payment Method is Collect or Third Party. If the
Billable Account number needs to be updated, then this value is taken from the carrier account
associated with the selected preferred service.
Payment Method. Freight Payment Method (XMSHDR0.SHTERM). This field is updated
when freight billing applies to the preferred service.
COD Payment Method. COD Payment Method (XMSHDR0.SHCODM). If the Freight
Payment Method is one of the COD varieties, then it is usually also necessary to update this
field.
Instructions. Instructions are updated onto the Shipment Texts record (XMSTXT0), based on
the system value to determine the text id (XMSTXT0.STTYPE):
Table 10.12 
Special Instructions System Value
Category
Key
Value
SPS
TEXT ID - SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
[Text ID with special instructions]
Inducted Location. The Routing Guide Rule may also determine the Shipper Account under
which the shipment is shipped when a particular service is chosen. The Packing Location
(virtual field SHWHOUSE) on the shipment is set, which determines the Shipper Account.
For more about Packing Locations, see Chapter 2, “Packing Locations,” on page 9. For more
information about inducted locations, see “Inducted Location” on page 153.
Chargeable Service. This field is relevant when you use the Routing Guide Rule to determine
which service should be used for billing. You can choose to ship using one method, and to bill
using another method. This information is stored in the virtual field SHCHRGROUT.
Third Party Info. The Third Party Address information, which overrides the address data in
XMSNAM0 when the SNTYPE is TP. You can specify this information so that it is
communicated to the carrier during the EOD process.
Updates are also made to shipment fields that are not determined by fields on the Routing
Assignment tab:
ETA Date. Expected Time of Arrival date (SHEDTE). If a transit time is calculated by the
appropriate rating engine, then this field is updated.
Transit Time. If a Transit Time is calculated by the appropriate rating engine, the Transit Time
(SHJTEM) and Time Units (SHJTMEUNT) fields are updated.
Transport Mode. If the Transport Mode exists in the RTMODE field of the Service record
(XTROUT0. RTMODE), then this value is updated onto the SHMODE field on the shipment.
Estimated Ship Date. This value is not stored in a field. It is determined using a combination
of factors, as follows:
• The default Estimated Ship Date is taken from the Ship Date on the shipment.
• A check runs to determine whether there is a cut-off time for this service specified in the
system values in Table 10.13. The system values are listed in the order that they are
checked. If a system value does not exist, the field is next checked against the Service
(XTROUT0) record in the RTCTME field.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
161
Table 10.13 
System Values for Shipment Times
Category
Key
Description
SPS
SHIPLATESTTIME: [service]: [Packing Location]
Specify the appropriate time in
HH:MM format.
The service must be an entry in the RT
option and Packing Location must be
is a valid packing location in the LN
option.
SPS
SHIPLATESTTIME: [service]
As above.
SPS
SHIPLATESTTIME: [carrier]: [Packing Location]
As above.
SPS
SHIPLATESTTIME: [carrier]
As above.
• If a cut-off time has passed during the time that rate shopping runs, then the Estimated
Ship Date is moved forward to the next shipping day.
Any accessorials specified in the Accessorials tab of the Routing Guide assignment are added to
the shipment, provided that these accessorials are available for the selected service.
Rate Shopping and the Routing Guide
Use the Routing Guide to determine the services to consider during rate shopping, based on the
rules that apply to the shipment. The services listed in the Routing Assignment tab of any
applicable rules are considered for rate shopping.
Fig. 10.20
Example Routing Guide Rule Criteria
In this example, the Routing Guide rule criteria is a ship to country of US and a maximum ship
weight of 50 kg.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
162
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 10.21
Web UI Rate Shopping Task
Figure 10.21 displays rate shopping results based on the Routing Guide rule in Figure 10.7. You
can add further rules to make the routing criteria more or less specific. You can configure many
rules for the applicable origin. The routing criteria of each rule is applied against the shipment to
check whether the rule is valid for the shipment data. Only valid rules are used to determine the set
of services that are shopped for the shipment.
Reviewing Rate Shopping Results
When you run the Rate Shop task in the Workflow Portal, service rates are displayed. These
service rates are based on the characteristics of the shipment at the time of shopping request. For
details on the Rate Shopping screen in the Web UI, see User Guide: Transportation Management
System.
Service Selection Validation and the Routing Guide
It is possible to configure PRECISION to review the service currently assigned to a shipment,
which is stored in XMSHDR0.SHROUT, and to determine whether the route is valid for the
shipment based on the Routing Guide rules that apply to the shipment.
You can set a system value to specify that service selection validation takes place during rating.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Routing Guide
163
Table 10.14 
Routing Guide
Category
Key
Explanation
SPSROUTE
CHARGE CALCULATION VALIDATOR
There are three possible values:
blank - There is no validation during
manifesting.
ERROR - Validation is run during
rating. If the service does not pass
validation, then the shipment is not
rated. A message about the invalid
route is stored against the shipment
and displayed on the Invalid Rates tab
of the Rate Shop task.
WARNING - Validation is run during
manifesting. If the service does not
pass validation, then the shipment is
manifested. A warning is displayed to
the user.
Troubleshooting Routing Guide Problems
If you experience performance issues with the Routing Guide, refer to the PRECISION Reference
Guide Topic040 - Routing Guide and Rate Shopping for guidelines on how to design rules that run
efficiently. This guide also explains the debug option that is available when running the Routing
Guide in the Windows UI.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
164
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 11
TMS Workflow Tasks
This section describes the purpose of the Transportation Management System (TMS) functionality.
166
Provides a context for an administrator configuring TMS tasks.
Overview
166
Lists the TMS workflow tasks available for configuration and describes how to configure the most
important ones.
Configuring TMS Workflow Tasks
Configuring Transaction Toolbar TMS Tasks
180
Describes how to configure TMS tasks that typically appear on the Transaction Toolbar.
166
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
TMS tasks form a major part of any workflow your organization uses. For details on setting up
workflows, see Administration Guide: Base Web UI. For a list of all available workflow tasks, see
the List of Workflow Tasks tab in Appendix A on the QAD Document Library in QAD
Transportation Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
This section does not document all available tasks. Rather, it focuses on the TMS tasks that you are
likely to include in the workflows you create.
TMS Shipment Freight Statuses
The freight status of a shipment changes as it moves through the workflow. A shipment can have
one of five possible freight statuses:
• Pending. The shipment has not been rated.
• Rate. The shipment is in the process of being rated.
• Interim. This freight status is a preliminary rated status given to the shipment to facilitate first-
mile tracking.
• Rated. The shipment has been rated or shipped.
• Posted. The shipment has been rated or shipped, and the charges have been posted to an
external application.
Configuring TMS Workflow Tasks
Table 11.1 lists the TMS workflow tasks that you typically add to your workflow. There are four
common tasks that implement a parcel shipping workflow. In addition, the Routes, References and
Containers task can be configured for truck load (TL) and less than truckload (LTL) shipping.
For a discussion of the user functionality of these tasks, see User Guide: Transportation
Management System.
Table 11.1 
Available TMS Workflow Tasks
Task
Option
Description
Rate Shop
WFTRAT
The Rate Shop task is a results screen, displaying the available
carrier services for the shipment. The services available for the
shipment depend on how the Routing Guide is set up. You can select
the service you want to use and apply it to the shipment.
To view carrier services that failed to rate for the shipment, click the
Invalid Rates tab.
Manifest
WFTMAN The Manifest task enables you to review and edit key details of the
shipment, and to add the shipment to the EOD Manifest.
Documents
WFTDOC The Documents task enables you to print and e-mail shipment
documents and to associate new documents with the shipment.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Workflow Tasks
Task
Option
Address
WFTADD The Address task enables you to review or set the address for the
current shipment.
Routes, References
and Containers
WFTRRC The Routes, References and Containers task enables you to review
and add shipping details for the current shipment. These details
include dates, locations, references, and information on any vessels
or containers linked to the shipment.
167
Description
Rate Shop Task
The Rate Shop task contains nine columns, displaying the results of your rate shop. The user can
configure these columns. For an explanation of the results, see User Guide: Transportation
Management System.
Fig. 11.1
Rate Shop Task
Table 11.2 
Rate Shop Task System Values
Category Key
Description
ITRAX
Determines the charge columns that appear on the screen. Assigning
a value of CUSTOMER causes the Buying Charge column to
appear. The Buying Charge is the amount that the shipper pays the
carrier for shipping the item. Assigning a value of COMPANY
causes the Selling Charge column to appear. The Selling Charge is
the amount that the shipper charges the buyer for shipping the item.
Assigning a value of BOTH causes the Buying column and the
Selling column to appear.
RATE SHOP SHOW
BASE COSTS
Possible values: COMPANY, CUSTOMER, BOTH
Default value: COMPANY
ITRAX
RATE SHOP TASK DEFAULT SORT
This system value controls how the results are sorted.
Possible values: COST, MODE, LEADTIME, SERVICE,
BUYING_COST, CARRIER_AND_COST.
By default, results are sorted based on buying cost. If buying costs
are not displayed, then the results are sorted based on selling cost.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
168
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Manifest Task
The Manifest task enables you to confirm a shipment as rated, assign a tracking number to the
shipment, print a carrier label, and make the shipment available for EOD manifest.
Fig. 11.2
Manifest Task
There are four possible tabs on this screen:
• Details
• Surcharges
• Parties
• Additional
For more information on the contents of the Details, Surcharges, and Parties tabs, see User Guide:
Transportation Management System.
The Additional tab can be used to add extra fields to the Manifest task. This tab consists of two
sections. The left side of the screen contains custom fields that are not commonly used. Your
company may want to add more information to the shipment when rating it. You can request that
the PRECISION Services team customize this section of the Additional tab to capture this
additional information. The right side of the screen contains fields that relate to the shipment
carrier. For example, Figure 11.3 contains fields relating to FedEx. The additional tab is not
relevant for all carriers.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Workflow Tasks
169
Fig. 11.3
Manifest Task: Additional Tab
Table 11.3 lists the system values that you can use to change the appearance of the Manifest task.
Table 11.3 
System Values: Manifest Task
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
MANIFEST TASK
SHOW DESP DATE
To remove the Despatch Date field from the Manifest task screen,
set this system value to no. The default value is yes.
ITRAX
DTS STATE CODE
VALIDATION
This system value determines whether the state code on the Parties
tab is required.
Possible values: Optional, Mandatory.
By default, this value is set to Optional.
appears on
WORKFLOW MANIFEST_PROCES Before a shipment is rated, a Process button
the Details tab. You can click this Process button to rate the
S_ACTION
shipment, or click the down arrow to see a menu of options. This
system value determines the actions that are available when the user
clicks the Process button or the menu options linked to the button.
There are three possible actions that can appear in the Process menu
button:
• Process (Print Label)
• Process (Don’t Print Label)
• Process (Print Label and Documents)
• For each menu option, there is a section within this system value
that can be set to true or false:
• Process (Print Label) - do_print
• Process (Don’t Print Label) - no_print
• Process (Print Label and Documents) print_label_and_documents
There is also a default section, which specifies which of the above
three options appears on the Process menu button.
Example:default:no_print,do_print:true,no_print:true,do_print_label
_and_documents:false
In this example, the Process (Print Label) and Process (Don’t Print
Label) options appear in the Process menu. The Process (Print Label
& Documents) option does not appear. Clicking the Process button
activates the Process (Don’t Print Label) option.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
170
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
SHOW CUSTOM
MANIFEST TASK
TAB
If this system value is set to Yes, then the Additional tab is shown.
This tab displays additional fields that are carrier-specific. If your
company requires additional information to be recorded about the
shipment when it is being rated, then contact the PRECISION
Services team. This team can add fields to the Additional tab to
record this information.
ITRAX
MANIFEST TASK
SHOW TRAILERID
If this system value is set to Yes, then the trailer id field is shown on
the Custom tab. By default this field is not shown.
ITRAX
SHOW APPLET
If this system value is set to Yes, then a Get Weight link appears next
to the Gross Weight field. Clicking this link allows the user to
determine the weight from a scales connected to the serial port on
the client machine.
This system value requires some client side setup so that the
application can download and run a Java applet that performs the
communication with the serial port. Navigate to the folder
‘WebClient\Get Weight and Print Applets’ in the root install folder
on the server. The root install folder is usually called
Precision\WebUI or Precision\WebUI<VERSION_NUMBER>. The
folder contains a readme text file that describes the steps to
complete.
ITRAX
CONSOL:PACK
PRORATE METHOD
This value applies to consolidated shipments. When a consolidated
shipment is processed, the package and tracking information can be
copied down onto the child shipments. This system value determines
the type of information that the system copies to child shipments.
Possible values: Pack, Tracking, None.
If set to Pack, then the system copies the package information from
the consolidation to the child shipments.
If set to Tracking, then the system pushes the tracking number from
the consolidated shipment to the child shipments. If the
consolidation has more than one package and tracking number, the
child shipment is assigned the tracking number related to the
particular package that the child shipment is in.
If set to None, then no information is transferred to child shipments.
By default, this system value is set to None.
ITRAX
DTS SHOW BASE
COSTS
ITRAX
MANIFEST TASK
SHOW INSURANCE
This value determines the charge columns that appear on the screen.
Assigning a value of CUSTOMER causes the Customer Charge
column to display. Assigning a value of COMPANY causes the
Company Charge column to display. Assigning a value of BOTH
causes the Customer Charge and Company Charge columns to
display.
Possible values: COMPANY, CUSTOMER, BOTH.
If this value is set to Yes and the service chosen offers insurance,
then the user can use the Surcharges tab to enter insurance amounts
for the packages in the shipment. The type of insurance offered
depends on the carrier service. This option allows the user to select
insurance, but it does not guarantee that the carrier provides it.
Possible values: Yes, No.
Default value: No
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Workflow Tasks
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
AUTO-OPEN-PDF
If this value is set to Yes, then any PDF documents produced when
the user rates the shipment open automatically in the browser. The
user may have to set the security settings of their browser to ensure
that the PDF has the permission to open.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
171
172
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Description
SPS
DELIVERY TERMS
TO PAY METHODS
This system value is used to configure default delivery terms and
payment methods in the Details tab. The system assigns these
default values based on the contents of the Route and Delivery
Terms fields in the Details tab. The user can leave these default
values as they are, or enter other values in these fields.
Format: <COMMAND1>|<COMMAND2>|...|<COMMANDN>
If you do not include at least one | symbol in the command, an error
occurs.
Each command has the format:
<SERVICE>=<SERVICE_VALUE>,<TERM>=
<TERM_VALUE>,<FRT>=<FRT_VALUE>,<DUTY>=
<DUTY_VALUE>,<COD>=<COD_VALUE>
The parts of a shipment that can be checked are:
SERVICE - The service related to the shipment, which displays in
the Route field of the Details tab. The complete list of services is
stored in the RT QuickPath option.
TERM - The delivery term related to the shipment, which displays
in the Delivery Terms field of the Details tab. The complete list of
services is stored in the DE QuickPath option.
The SERVICE is checked first, and then the TERM. If there is no
service, then the TERM is checked.
The fields that can be assigned a value are:
FRT - The Freight Payment Method field of the Details tab.
DUTY - The Duty/Tax Payment Method field of the Details tab.
COD - The COD Payment Method field of the Details tab.
For a list of possible values for these fields, see the
Message_Field_Lookups tab of Appendix A on the QAD Document
Library in QAD Transportation Management|v2012 R00|Admin
Guides|Appendices.
Example: TERM=EXW,FRT=COLLECT,DUTY=
CONSIGNEEPAYSDUTY|
TERM=DDP,FRT=DELIVERYDUTYPAID,DUTY=
CONSIGNEEPAYSDUTY|
SERVICE=FDXGND,TERM=DDP,FRT=PREPAIDADD,DUTY=
THIRDPARTYDUTYVAT|
SERVICE=UPSUS001,TERM=CPT,FRT=CODSHIPCOST,COD=
CASHIERSCHECKMONEYORDER
In this example, SERVICE is checked first, and then TERM. These
values are compared with the contents of the Route and Delivery
Terms fields on the Details tab of the Manifest task. If the Route
field is not filled in, or if it does not correspond to any of the values
in the commands, then TERM is checked. The first section of the
example checks if the Delivery Terms field (TERM) is set to ex
works (EXW). If it is, then the system sets the Freight Payment
Method to Collect and the Duty field to Consignee. If none of the
conditions are true, the fields in the Details tab are not changed.
Regardless of the effect of this system value, the user can manually
change the values of the fields in the Details tab.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Workflow Tasks
Category
Key
WORKLOAD ADDRESS TASK READONLY ROLES
173
Description
To make a particular partner role address read-only in the Parties tab,
enter the number that corresponds to the partner role.
Enter a comma-separated list of roles, for example 14,TP. The
partner codes are accessible from the PI Quickpath option.
When this system value is not set, some addresses are still read-only,
as it is not always appropriate to edit them.
This system value controls edits to addresses in the Address task of
the Manifest task also.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
174
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Documents Task
The Documents task enables you to view any documents associated with the shipment and to add
new documents. You can select documents from the list and e-mail them.
Fig. 11.4
Documents Task
To send e-mails through PRECISION, you must adjust the settings in Highway. For more
information on this process, see Administration Guide: Base.
There are a number of system values that affect the Documents task.
Table 11.4 
System Values Related to the Documents Task
Category
Key
WORKLOAD
DOCUMENT EMAIL Enter the text that you want to appear in the subject line of
the e-mail.
SUBJECT
Description
WORKLOAD
DOCUMENTS
EMAIL BODY
Enter the text that you want to appear in the body of the email.
ITRAX
COLLATE PDF
LOCALES
This system value lists the locale or locales that are used to
generate PDF versions of the document. When the user is
using a locale in the list, the system combines all the
documents into one PDF document that can then be
previewed or e-mailed.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Workflow Tasks
Category
Key
ITRAX
DOCUMENT TASK - This system value allows you to hide buttons from this
HIDE BUTTONS
page; add a comma-separated list of values. Each entry in
the list represents a button that you want to remove.
175
Description
Possible values: PRINT, DELETE, SAVE, EMAIL,
GRID_PRINT, GRID_PREVIEW, GRID_HISTORY,
ADD.
ITRAX
AUTO-OPEN-PDF
If this value is set to Yes, then any PDF documents
produced open automatically in the browser. The user may
have to set the security settings of their browser to ensure
that the PDF opens.
Associating External Files with a Shipment
The user can associate external files with a shipment in PRECISION by using the Add a new
document to the shipment section in the Documents task. Each document that is uploaded to
PRECISION is stored in a table, and has a folder and name associated with it. The table also
contains information about the state of the shipment at the time that the document was uploaded. A
query can be run on the shipment at a later stage, or exported to an external area for storage.
Configuring Image Classes
To configure the system to store these documents, use the Image Class screen. The D2 QuickPath
option opens the Image Class screen. In this context, an image class is a file type that can be stored
in PRECISION. Each entry in the Image Class table contains information about a particular file
type.
Fig. 11.5
Image Class
Your PRECISION installation already has the most common file types listed in this table. You can
add any other file types that you need. Click the Add icon at the bottom of the table to display the
Image Class Create window.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
176
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 11.6
Image Class Create Window
There are a number of important fields to complete on this screen:
Image Class. A code to identify the class. In the date fields next to this field, specify the date
from which the image class can be used in the system.
Description. A description of the file type.
Document Type. In the first field, enter the number 97. Use the lookup icon in the second field
to select IMAGE. This document type identifies the file as being different from other
PRECISION shipping documents.
File extension subtype. A code to associate the image class with a windows file type; for
example, DOCX.
Rename imported files? Set to yes or no. If you set it to yes, specify the File Naming Syntax in
the relevant field.
File Naming Syntax. If you set the Rename imported files? field to yes, then you can specify
how to rename the files using this field. There are a number of tokens that you can use to
specify the format of the name. The tokens are given a run time value. For example, <month>
is 1 in January, and 12 in December.
Table 11.5 
Filename Tokens
Token
Run Time Value
<month>
Month number
Example: 12
<year>
Year number
Example: 2000
<day>
Day number
Example: 31
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Workflow Tasks
Token
Run Time Value
<date>
Date
177
Example: 311201
The date format is set on the user profile. Use the
QuickPath option US to set the date format preference for
a user
<today>
Session date
Example: 311201
<time>
Session time
Example: 121559
<client>
Current transaction client
<user>
Current user
<drive>
Drive location where the file originated
Example: C:\
<drive-letter>
Drive letter where the file originated
Example: C
<path>
The path where the file originated, without the <drive>
<full-path>
<drive><path>
<file>
File name of the original file without the full path
Move or Copy imported files? Set this field to Copy.
Folder Location. The folder location for the copied files. This folder location must be visible to
the JBoss application server.
Viewing Stored Images
When users add documents to a shipment using the Documents task, an entry is added to the Image
Register. This table is accessible through the D1 QuickPath option.
Fig. 11.7
Image Register
Each entry in the Image Register has a unique image identifier. The format of the identifier is
controlled by the NEXT SEQUENCE NUMBER system values.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
178
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Table 11.6 
Image Identifier Format
Category
Key
Description
IMAGE
NEXT SEQUENCE NO:
Specifies the format of the image identifier stored in the
Image Register.
Enter a value of the format [prefix,number,length] where
prefix is a three-letter code, number is the sequence
number, and length is the number of digits in the identifier.
The sequence number fills from the right of the identifier.
Example: IMG,207,9 results in the identifier
IMG000000207.
IMAGE
NEXT SEQUENCE NO:
<FILE_EXTENSION>
If the file that you are uploading has the extension
<FILE_EXTENSION>, then this system value is used. IT
works in the same way as NEXT SEQUENCE NO:
Address Task
Use the Address task to enable users to view and update addresses for each partner associated with
the shipment.
Fig. 11.8
Address Task
You can configure the list of displayed partners based on the partner types in your system. You can
allow the user to edit the address details for the partner, or you can display the address details as
read-only. To set these properties, open the system values page in the Web UI and configure the
system values listed in Table 11.7.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Workflow Tasks
179
Table 11.7 
Address Task System Values
Category
Key
Description
WORKLOAD
ADDRESS TASK READONLY ROLES
To make a particular partner role address read-only in the
Address task pop-up window, enter the number that
corresponds to that partner role. You can enter more than
one partner role using a comma-separated list. The full list
of partner role codes is accessible from the PI Quickpath
option.
When this system value is not set, some addresses are still
read-only, as it is not always appropriate to edit them.
This system value also controls edits to addresses in the
Parties tab of the Manifest task.
WORKLOAD
ADDRESS TASK ROLES
Enter a comma-separated list of partner roles. Each role
appears in the Address task pop-up window. The
addresses are blank or complete, depending on the data
saved in the system for that partner. The full list of partner
role codes is accessible from the PI Quickpath option.
Example: Delivered from;17,Delivered To;18,Ship
To;01,Shipper;14,Third Party;TP. The partner codes are
accessible from the PI Quickpath option.
ITRAX
DTS STATE CODE
VALIDATION
Possible values: optional, mandatory. If this system value
is set to mandatory, then the state code must match a state
code in the STATE CODES lookup domain table available
through the UY QuickPath option.
WORDLOAD
ADDRESS TASK ALLOW EDIT ROLE
Possible values: yes, no. If this system value is set to no,
then the user can only use this task to view roles the
administrator specifies. They cannot add or delete roles.
ITRAX
SET SHIP TO
CONTACT IN
SHUS10
Possible values: yes, no. If this system value is set to yes,
then the Ship To contact name is also stored in the userdefined field XMSHDR0.SHUS10.
Routes, References and Containers Task
The Routes, References and Containers task enables you to view and edit the details of the current
shipment.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
180
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 11.9
Routes, References and Containers Task
Currently, there are no system values to configure this screen.
Configuring Transaction Toolbar TMS Tasks
You can configure the transaction toolbar at the bottom of the Workflow screen to include buttons
for some tasks that are commonly associated with workflow.
For details on the configuration of the transaction toolbar, see the Workflow chapter of
Administration Guide: Base Web UI. Table 11.8 displays the TMS tasks that you can add to this
toolbar.
Table 11.8 
TMS Transaction Toolbar Options
Option
Description
WFOEOD
Run EOD Manifest task.
For details on how to configure EOD Manifest, see
Chapter 13, “TMS Menu Options,” on page 209.
WFODOC
Run Documents task.
This task is the same as the Documents task discussed
earlier in this chapter.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 12
Desktop Shipping
This section describes how to configure the Desktop Shipping functionality using the System
Value Setup page.
Overview
182
Explains the purpose of Desktop Shipping.
182
Describes how the shipment wizard provides templates to match organization procedures.
Shipment Wizard Template
Configuring Desktop Shipping Steps
186
Describes how to configure the steps in the desktop shipping wizard.
204
Describes how to configure the Return Label facility.
Creating a Return Label
Rules
205
Describes how to configure the desktop shipping wizard so that shipments adhere to a set of rules.
205
Describes how to configure the help links on each step of the desktop shipping wizard.
Help Links
Messages
206
Describes how to display messages as the user progresses through the desktop shipping wizard
steps.
207
Describes how to configure loading messages to display as the user waits for the next step of the
desktop shipping wizard to appear.
Loading Messages
207
Describes how to configure approval alerts to appear when a shipment is being sent from a
particular country.
Approval Alerts
182
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
Before configuring Desktop Shipping, it is recommended that you read User Guide:
Transportation Management System for a description of how the desktop shipping functionality
works from a user perspective.
Most shipments are the product of ERP software or black box messaging. However, your
organization can use Desktop Shipping to create a shipment within PRECISION by capturing
partner and product information. The typical Desktop Shipping user is not a shipping clerk but a
desktop user who occasionally ships a parcel to a customer.
Shipment Wizard Template
You can configure the appearance of Desktop Shipping by creating templates for the Shipment
Wizard. The user selects a template from the drop-down menu on step one of the desktop shipping
wizard, as shown in Figure 12.1.
Fig. 12.1
Shipment Wizard Menu
Shipment Wizard templates consist of a number of steps with fields that the user completes to
create a shipment. The steps in the template reflect the procedure that your organization follows to
create a shipment. You can create multiple templates. For example, an international shipment for a
particular customer requires different fields and steps to a domestic shipment. You can create
global templates, or templates for specific clients, users, or client/user combinations. Each user
sees a list of templates appropriate to their role.
You can define a template with up to ten steps. Table 12.1 displays these steps in the order that
they appear in a template. The Origin/Destination step is mandatory; all other steps are optional,
but typically the Confirmation step is included.
Table 12.1 
Desktop Shipping Steps
Wizard Steps Step Name
Contents
ORIG
Origin/Destination
Ship from and ship to addresses, and package and
payment details.
COMP
Compliance
Compliance checks on the shipment including checks to
prevent shipments being sent to denied parties or
embargoed countries. You can display the compliance
check results in a pop-up window or in a separate step.
PACK
Package Details
Details of multiple packages within a shipment.
PROD
Products
Details of multiple products within a shipment.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
Wizard Steps Step Name
183
Contents
METH
Method/References References related to the shipment; for example, customs
and invoice references. This step also allows you to
specify search criteria to use when shopping for rates.
SERV
Services (Rates)
A list of rates available for the shipment, including details
of the charges.
ACCL
Accessorials
A list of add-on services offered with a particular service.
DOCS
Documents
Facility to upload documents to the shipment; for
example, customs documents.
SUMM
Summary
A summary of the details entered in previous steps.
CONF
Confirmation
This page appears when a shipment is created. It lists any
errors related to the shipment. If the shipment has been
rated, then the page contains a link to the shipment label.
Configuring each wizard template requires changes to system values. For a full list of Desktop
Shipping system values, see the Desktop Shipping tab of Appendix A on the QAD Document
Library in QAD Transportation Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
Setting Up Wizard Steps
There are ten available templates, each with its own system value. The system values are DSTEMPLATES 01 to DS-TEMPLATES 10. These system values have the category ITRAX and key
DS-TEMPLATES <NN>, where <NN> is a number from 01 to 10. To specify the steps to include
on a wizard template:
1
In the Web UI, open the System Value Setup page. On the Tag Search tab, use the drop-down
menu to search for the tag Desktop Shipping Wizards and click Search.
2
Locate the system value that you want to configure. Ensure that the In Use attribute is selected
and displaying as true. Ensure that the Environment attribute is set to *STANDARD.
3
Click the Template
icon for the template that you want to edit. A pop-up window
containing the template opens.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
184
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 12.2
Desktop Shipping Template
4
Double-click the text at the top of the pop-up window to edit the title of the template. The user
sees this text in the Shipment Wizard drop-down menu on the Origin/Destination step of
Desktop Shipping.
5
Select the steps that you want to include in the template. These steps are listed in Table 12.1.
Template Setup Explained
In addition to specifying the steps that appear in a template, you can configure the contents and
behavior of each step. Templates allow you to:
• Hide fields.
• Set default values for fields.
• Configure field validation.
• Set properties for a step; for example, you can add a help icon to a step. You can also configure
user messages or approval alerts to appear when users click Next on certain steps.
Note When you select the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value in the table of system values, a
help tip appears below the table. If you click the More Info link in this section, a Desktop Shipping
Templates Help page appears, providing information on how to configure the system value.
There are a number of sections in the desktop shipping system value template.
Table 12.2 
DS-TEMPLATES <NN> System Value Sections
Section
Purpose
Template Name
Assign a name to the template, and select the steps that you want to include in
the wizard.
Default
Assign default values to certain fields.
Hide
Remove certain fields from the screen.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
Section
Purpose
Messages
Messages can be displayed when a user clicks Next on a particular wizard
step. This section allows you to specify what message appears, and on which
step.
Hide Accessorials
The accessorials that appear on the Accessorials step vary depending on the
current carrier service. This section allows you to hide a particular accessorial
at a service level. Examples of accessorials are DryIce and SundayDelivery.
For a list of accessorials, see the Message_Field_Lookups tab of Appendix A
on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|v2012
R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
Hide Accessorials
Interim
If an interim service is specified, then accessorials that apply to this service are
displayed, excluding any accessorials listed in this field. Use the RT
QuickPath option to see which accessorials apply to a particular carrier
service. For a list of accessorials, see the Message_Field_Lookups tab of
Appendix A on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation
Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
Rules
This section contains a number of rules that you can apply to shipments. For
example, you can require each shipment to have the same country in the ship
from and ship to fields.
Property
This section contains a number of properties that you can switch on; for
example, Weight Mandatory. The properties in this section appear on different
steps within the wizard.
Property ORIG
Set properties on the Origin/Destination step.
Property COMP
Set properties on the Compliance step.
Property PACK
Set properties on the Package Details step.
Property PROD
Set properties on the Products step.
Property METH
Set properties on the Method/References step.
Property SERV
Set properties on the Services step.
Property ACCL
Set properties on the Accessorials step.
Property DOCS
Set properties on the Documents step.
Property SUMM
Set properties on the Summary step.
Property CONF
Set properties on the Confirmation step.
185
The Desktop Shipping tab of Appendix A contains details of fields in each section of the DSTEMAPLTES <NN> system value, along with details of other system values that you can use to
configure desktop shipping. “Configuring Desktop Shipping Steps” on page 186 highlights some
of these system values, and how they can be used to configure each step. Appendix A is located on
the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|
Appendices.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
186
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Configuring Desktop Shipping Steps
Origin/Destination Step
The Origin/Destination step is mandatory for all wizards. On this step, the user selects the
Shipment Wizard to use from a drop-down menu.
Fig. 12.3
Shipment Wizard Selection on the Origin/Destination Step
Configuring a Mailing List
On the Origin/Destination screen, the user specifies a mailing list in the Ship To address. This
facility is useful if the same shipment is being sent to multiple recipients. You can create mailing
lists using the QuickPath option ML to access the Mailing List screen. Figure 12.4 displays the
Mailing Lists Screen.
Fig. 12.4
Mailing Lists Screen
To delete an existing mailing list, select the mailing list from the table and click Delete.
To modify an existing mailing list, click the description of the mailing list.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
187
Fig. 12.5
Mailing List Update Screen
To create a mailing list, click Create.
Fig. 12.6
Mailing List Create Screen
Complete the fields on this screen with details of the new mailing list.
Mailing List Code. Enter a name for your mailing list. The Mailing List code field takes a
maximum of ten characters.
Description. Enter a description of the mailing list.
To add addresses to the mailing list, click Create and Add Addresses. The Mailing List Update
Screen displays, as in Figure 12.5.
To see the Add Address window, click Select from All Address Books or Select from Deliver To
Address Book.
Fig. 12.7
Add Address Window
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
188
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
The Add Address window contains a tab for each address book. To search a particular address
book, click the associated tab. To add a particular address to the mailing list, click the green plus
icon. To remove the address from the mailing list, click the minus sign. To save your changes to
the mailing list, click Update.
Fig. 12.8
Mailing List Update Screen with Added Addresses
You can add partners to your address books by typing NR in the QuickPath option and clicking the
PERSONAL or GLOBAL tab to access the specific address book. The Import tab on this screen
enables you to import partners. You can then add these partners to your address book. Click the
Help icon on the top left of this screen to view details of the file formats that you can import on
this page.
Fig. 12.9
Import Mailing List
Any partners added to a mailing list must have the associated In Use flag set to true to be
considered by desktop shipping. If a partner is not associated with a consignee role, then it is not
considered by desktop shipping, even when the partner is added to the mailing list. There is a
limitation on the number of partners that can be added to a mailing list. The process is an
interactive one, and the more partners on the mailing list, the longer it takes Desktop Shipping to
move from one step to the next.
The user selects the Mailing List field in the Ship To section of the Origin/Destination step. The
user then uses the lookup icon in the Deliver To field to select a mailing list.
Address Validation
To enable address validation of US and Canadian Ship To addresses, set the DTS SHIPTO
VERIFY ALLOWED system value in the ITRAX category to yes. The Verify Address field then
appears below the Ship To address. When the user selects this field, the system checks if the Ship
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
To address is valid. If the user enters an invalid Ship To address, a pop-up window appears
suggesting another format. The user can choose to accept the new address format or to skip
address validation.
Fig. 12.10
Address Validation Pop-up Window
Note You must configure the address validation plug-in before the address validation feature
works. This address validation setup depends on the vendor that your company is using. The
Services team configures this validation.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
189
190
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Compliance Step
The Compliance step allows you to run a denied party list check and an embargoed country check
on shipments that the user creates in desktop shipping. You can configure this step so that failure
of a check prevents the user from moving on to the next step. Alternatively, you can choose to
display a warning and let the user continue to the next step. This warning can appear as a step in
the desktop shipping wizard or as a pop-up window. For an explanation of the Compliance step
from a user point of view, see the Desktop Shipping step of User Guide: Transportation
Management System.
Fig. 12.11
Compliance Step
Fig. 12.12
Compliance Pop-up Window
Use the fields in the Property COMP section of the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value to
configure compliance checks.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
191
Table 12.3 
Property COMP Fields
Field
Value
Comp Checks
A comma-separated list of compliance check codes indicating the checks that
you want to run on the shipment.
Possible values:
EBL - Embargoed countries list
DPL - Denied parties list
Compliance Results
Possible values:
default - The compliance check results display as a desktop shipping step.
popup - The compliance check results display in a pop-up window.
none - The results of the compliance check are not shown to the user.
Continue On Fail
Possible values:
yes - If a compliance check fails, the user can continue to the next step in the
desktop shipping wizard.
no - If a compliance check fails, the user cannot continue to the next step in the
desktop shipping wizard.
Note If you set Compliance Results to none and Continue On Fail to no, then failure of a
compliance check prevents the user from moving on to the next step. When the fields have these
settings, the user does not see any message explaining the compliance failure. This configuration is
not recommended.
Fig. 12.13
Property COMP Fields in the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> System Value
Package Details Step
The user records the details of a single package using the Package Details section of the
Origin/Destination step. If a shipment has multiple packages, the user enters details of each
package using the Package Details step.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
192
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 12.14
Package Details Step
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
193
Products Step
To enter details of the products in the shipment, use the Products step.
Fig. 12.15
Products Step
Skipping the Products Step
Use the system value DTS SKIP STEP 3 if you want to skip the Products step. This system value
overrides the selection of the Products step in the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value. If you
set this system value to CHOICE and create a domestic shipment with the Multiple Packages field
selected on the Origin/Destination step, then:
• the Skip Product Details Step option appears
• the Skip Product Details Step is checked on the Package Details step when you select the
Products/Commodities option on the Package Details step.
Note The Skip Product Details Step field only appears for Domestic shipments.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
194
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Fig. 12.16
Skip Product Details Step Option
Method/References Step
The Method/References step enables selection of a carrier service, rate shopping with a specific
carrier, or rate shopping from multiple carriers. It also allows the user to enter references to
identify the shipment and associated documents.
Fig. 12.17
Method/References Step
There are a number of system values that you can use to configure this step.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
Table 12.4 
System Values Related to the Method/References Step
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
DTS ADDITIONAL
REFERENCE
Determines whether the Additional Reference field
appears on the Method/References step. It controls
whether the field is mandatory or optional. You can
choose to assign a domain for a lookup list.
Format: show=<YES/NO>,req=<YES/NO>,domain=
<DOMAIN>. Specify a domain using the appropriate
lookup domain code from the User Defined Lookup
Domain table accessed through the UY QuickPath option.
Default value: show=yes,req=no,domain=
For this value to work correctly, include the domain
section of the value even when it is blank.
ITRAX
DTS FORWARDER
REFERENCE
Determines whether the Forwarders Reference field
appears on the Method/References step or not. It controls
whether the field is mandatory or optional. You can
choose to assign a domain for a lookup list.
Format: show=<YES/NO>,req=<YES/NO>,domain=
<DOMAIN>. Specify a domain using the appropriate
lookup domain code from the User Defined Lookup
Domain table accessed through the UY QuickPath option.
Default value: show=yes,req=no,domain=
For this value to work correctly, include the domain
section of the value even when it is blank.
ITRAX
DTS CUSTOMER
REFERENCE
Determines whether the Customs Reference field appears
on the Method/References step. It controls whether the
field is mandatory or optional. You can choose to assign a
domain for a lookup list.
Format: show=<YES/NO>,req=<YES/NO>,domain=
<DOMAIN>. Specify a domain using the appropriate
lookup domain code from the User Defined Lookup
Domain table accessed through the UY QuickPath option.
Default value: show=yes,req=no,domain=
For this value to work correctly, include the domain
section of the value even when it is blank.
ITRAX
DTS OTHER
REFERENCE
Determines whether the Other Reference field appears on
the Method/References step. It controls whether the field
is mandatory or optional. You can choose to assign a
domain for a lookup list.
Format: show=<YES/NO>,req=<YES/NO>,domain=
<DOMAIN>. Specify a domain using the appropriate
lookup domain code from the User Defined Lookup
Domain table accessed through the UY QuickPath option.
Default value: show=yes,req=no,domain=
For this value to work correctly, include the domain
section of the value even when it is blank.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
195
196
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
DTS PO NUMBER
Determines whether the PO Number field appears on the
Method/References step. It controls whether the field is
mandatory or optional. You can choose to assign a domain
for a lookup list.
Format: show=<YES/NO>,req=<YES/NO>,domain=
<DOMAIN>. Specify a domain using the appropriate
lookup domain code from the User Defined Lookup
Domain table accessed through the UY QuickPath option.
Default value: show=yes,req=no,domain=
For this value to work correctly, include the domain
section of the value even when it is blank.
ITRAX
DTS INVOICE
NUMBER
Determines whether the Invoice Number field appears on
the Method/References step. It controls whether the field
is mandatory or optional. You can choose to assign a
domain for a lookup list.
Format: show=<YES/NO>,req=<YES/NO>,domain=
<DOMAIN>. Specify a domain using the appropriate
lookup domain code from the User Defined Lookup
Domain table accessed through the UY QuickPath option.
Default value: show=yes,req=no,domain=
For this value to work correctly, include the domain
section of the value even when it is blank.
ITRAX
DTS ORDER
NUMBER
Determines whether the Order Number field appears on
the Method/References step. It controls whether the field
is mandatory or optional. You can choose to assign a
domain for a lookup list.
Format: show=<YES/NO>,req=<YES/NO>,domain=
<DOMAIN>. Specify a domain using the appropriate
lookup domain code from the User Defined Lookup
Domain table accessed through the UY QuickPath option.
Default value: show=yes,req=no,domain=
For this value to work correctly, include the domain
section of the value even when it is blank.
ITRAX
DTS VALUE TO REQ If the customs value exceeds the amount set in this system
INVOICE NUM
value, the user must add an invoice number to the
shipment. Enter a numeric value.
ITRAX
DTS DELIVER
OPTIONS
Use this field to specify the criteria used when selecting
rates. Setting this system value to NONE hides this field.
Possible values: A comma-separated list of
<Option>:<description>, where the option and description
are separated by a “:”.
Default value: FASTEST:Fastest
Service,CHEAPEST:Best price
service,PROMISEDATE:By promise
date,WITHIN1:Within 1 day,WITHIN2:Within 2
days,WITHIN5:Within 5 days,WITHIN10:Within 10
days,CHEAPEST2:Show all possibilities.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
197
Services Step
The Services step shops for rates based on the shipment details and the delivery and carrier criteria
that the user specifies in the Method/References step.
Fig. 12.18
Services Step
Table 12.5 displays the system values that you can use to configure this screen
Table 12.5 
Services Step System Values
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
RATE SHOP SHOW
BASE COSTS
Determines the charge columns that appear on the screen.
Assigning a value of CUSTOMER causes the Buying
Charge column to appear. The Buying Charge is the
amount that the shipper pays the carrier for shipping the
item. Assigning a value of COMPANY causes the Selling
Charge column to appear. The Selling Charge is the
amount that the shipper charges the buyer for shipping the
item. Assigning a value of BOTH causes the Buying
column and the Selling column to appear.
Possible values: COMPANY, CUSTOMER, BOTH
Default value: COMPANY
ITRAX
RATE SHOP TASK DEFAULT SORT
Controls how the results are sorted.
Possible values: COST, MODE, LEADTIME, SERVICE,
BUYING_COST, CARRIER_AND_COST.
By default, results are sorted based on buying cost. If
buying costs are not displayed, then the results are sorted
based on selling cost.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
198
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Skipping the Services Step
To give the user the option to skip the Services step, set the DTS SKIP RATES ALLOWED
system value in the ITRAX category value to yes. Skip rate shop step only appears when the user
selects the Specific Service option on the Method/References step, and when no default service is
set. A default service is set using the default section of the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value.
Fig. 12.19
Skip Rate Shop Step Option
If you do not include the Services step in the Shipment Wizard, you can specify the service using
the Service field in the Default section of the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
199
Accessorials Step
The Accessorials step offers additional services for a shipment. These services are not part of the
carrier service by default. The accessorials available depend on the carrier service that the user
chooses in either the Method/References step or the Services step.
Fig. 12.20
Accessorials Step
Enabling Accessorials by Default
At the global level, use the DTS DEFAULT SURCHARGES system value to enter a list of the
accessorials that you want to select by default.
At the template level, use the accessorialcharges field in the HIDE section of the DSTEMPLATES <NN> system value to enter a list of the accessorials that you want to select by
default. Setting the template-level system value overrides the global-level system value.
Do not select accessorials that conflict with one another, such as
DeliveryConfirmationAdultSignatureRequired and DeliveryConfirmationVerbal. Regardless of
the accessorials that you include in the accessorialcharges field, only the accessorials applicable to
the selected service appear. Use the RT QuickPath option, or refer to your carrier, to determine the
accessorials or surcharges listed for each service. For a list of accessorials, see the
Message_field_Lookups tab of Appendix A on the QAD Document Library in QAD
Transportation Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices..
Hiding Accessorials
You can hide accessorials using the Hide Accessorials section of the DS-TEMPLATES <NN>
system value. The format for this system value is <SERVICE1>=
<ACCESSORIAL1>,...,<ACCESSORIALN>&<SERVICE2>=
<ACCESSORIAL1>,...,<ACCESSORIALN>&...<SERVICEN>=
<ACCESSORIAL1>,...,<ACCESSORIALN>. It hides the accessorials listed in
<ACCESSORIAL> for the service listed in <SERVICE>.
The Hide Accessorials Interim section of the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value works in the
same way, but it applies to an interim service. If your shipment does not have an interim service
associated with it, then this system value is not relevant.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
200
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Skipping the Accessorials Step
To skip this step, set the system value DTS SKIP STEP 6 to yes. This system value overrides the
selection of the Accessorials step in the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
201
Documents Step
The Documents step allows the user to attach documents to a shipment; for example, customs or
hazardous material documents.
Fig. 12.21
Documents Step
Skipping the Documents Step
It is possible to skip this step when you are creating a domestic shipment. The Skip Document Step
field appears on the Accessorials step to allow the user to bypass the Documents step. This option
is not available when you are creating international shipments. However, even in the case of
international shipments, there is no obligation for the user to add documents to the shipment. The
user can simply click Next to move on to the next step.
Adding Document Texts to the Shipment
It is possible to add notes to the shipment on the Documents page. To specify the maximum
number of notes that you can add in the Document Texts section, set DTS NUMBER OF TEXT
FIELDS in the ITRAX category to the appropriate number.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
202
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Summary Step
The Summary step displays details of the contents that the user entered in the previous desktop
shipping steps.
Fig. 12.22
Summary Step
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
203
Confirmation Step
This page confirms creation of the shipment or notifies the user when there is an error creating the
shipment. If a carrier label is available, the user can access the label from this page.
Fig. 12.23
Confirmation Step
Your company can use the Desktop Shipping wizard to rate a shipment and print a carrier label.
Alternatively, your company can use the wizard to record information about the shipment without
rating it. Another staff member completes the rating at a later stage. The Rate Shipment field in the
Property CONF section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN> controls this capability. Set this field to yes or
no depending on your company process. The default value is yes.
The Allowed Documents field in the Property CONF section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN> is used
with the Rate Shipment field. When Rate Shipment is set to no, a carrier label is not created, and
an internal traveler document is created instead. Use Allowed Documents to identify the traveler
document to use.
When Rate Shipment is set to no, use Allowed Document to specify a comma-separated list of
documents to create in addition to the carrier label. This scenario is common when making
international shipments, which typically require additional customs information.
The format of Allowed Documents is
<DOCUMENT_TYPE1]+[DOCUMENT_REFERENCE1],....,
[DOCUMENT_TYPEN]+[DOCUMENT_REFERENCEN]. An example value is
01+INVCANADA,02+INV2E. To be available for printing, the document has to be associated
with the shipment. This association of documents with the shipment depends on the rules that
apply to the shipment. Through the rules, documents get attached to a shipment. Allowed
Documents enables you to list a subset of the documents associated with the shipment that you
want to print. The complete list of document types available in PRECISION are accessible using
the DO QuickPath option.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
204
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Creating a Return Label
The user can create a return shipment and accompanying label when creating an outbound
shipment. The consignee can use the return label to return documentation or other items to the
consignor on receipt of the initial shipment. The return shipment always uses the same carrier as
the outbound shipment. If the user creates the outbound shipment on behalf of a third party, the
user can specify that the address of the third party appears on the return label.
To create the return label, the user selects the Provide a Return Label field in the Ship To section of
the Origin/Destination step. To include a third-party address in the return label, the user completes
the On Behalf Of field in the Ship From section.
Fig. 12.24
Origin/Destination Step with the Provide a Return Label and On Behalf Of Fields
Use the system values listed in Table 12.6 to make the Provide a Return Label and On Behalf Of
fields appear on the screen.
Table 12.6 
System Values to Configure the Return Label Facility
Category Key
Description
SPS
RETURNS - DEFAULT PACK TYPE
QBOX
SPS
RETURNS - DEFAULT SHIP TYPE
IM
SPS
RETURNS: SHIPMENT TYPE
52
SPS
RETURNS: TRANSACTION TYPE
T
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
Category Key
SPS
205
Description
RATING ONLY SHIP TRANS TYPES Possible values: Comma-separated list of letters from the
QuickPath option Z9. If you want to use the Return Label
facility, it is important that you do not include T in this
system value.
This system value enables you to specify a list of shipment
transaction types that you can rate but cannot ship. See
Topic 029 - System Values.xls for a more thorough
explanation of this system value.
ITRAX
DTS PRINT LABELS
SYSTEM SPS VERSION
yes
33
This value indicates that the version of the SPS is 33 or
higher. The ability to process a return label is available
from version 33 upwards.
Rules
The RULES section of the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value allows you to specify that
shipments created using the template must comply with certain rules. The rules are switched off by
default. The rules available are:
• samecountry - If this rule is switched on, then the Ship From and Ship To addresses for a
shipment must be in the same country. The user sees an error message and cannot proceed to
the next step in the wizard when the addresses are from different countries.
• customfccid - The purpose of this rule is beyond the scope of this documentation.
Help Links
For each step in a template wizard, you can add a link to a help page. The link appears on the top
right corner of the page, next to the wizard navigation steps, as shown in Figure 12.25.
Fig. 12.25
Method/References Page with Help Icon
For each wizard step, a system value controls the help icon, as shown in Table 12.8. Each of these
system values accepts a URL as a value, with the colon within the URL replaced by a tilde. For
example, http://www.qad.com becomes http~//www.qad.com. You can configure the help URL on
a global level and on a template level. The template-level system value overrides the global-level
value.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
206
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Table 12.7 
HELP URL System Values on a Global Level
Step
Setting
Origin/Destination
DTS HELP URL: ORIG STEP
Package Details
DTS HELP URL: PACK STEP
Products
DTS HELP URL: PROD STEP
Method/References
DTS HELP URL: METH STEP
Services
DTS HELP URL: SERV STEP
Accessorials
DTS HELP URL: ACCL STEP
Documents
DTS HELP URL: DOCS STEP
Summary
DTS HELP URL: SUMM STEP
Note There are no system values to configure the help icon for the Compliance and Confirmation
steps on a global level.
Table 12.8 
Help URL System Values on a Template Level
Step
Setting
Origin/Destination
Help URL field in Property ORIG section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Package Details
Help URL field in Property PACK section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Products
Help URL field in Property PROD section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Method/References
Help URL field in Property METH section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Services
Help URL field in Property SERV section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Accessorials
Help URL field in Property ACCL section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Documents
Help URL field in Property DOCS section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Summary
Help URL field in Property SUMM section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Confirmation
Help URL field in Property CONF section of DS-TEMPLATES <NN>.
Note There is no system value to configure the help icon on the Compliance step at a template
level.
Messages
It is possible to configure messages to appear when the user clicks Next on a desktop shipping
step. The message appears in a pop-up window. This behavior can be useful for reminding the user
of checks to carry out before continuing to the next step.
To add the message as a note in the Notes screen:
1
Access the Notes screen using the NO QuickPath option.
2
Enter a note ID and the message that you want to appear on the screen.
3
Go to the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value. The MESSAGES section of this system
value contains a field for each possible step in the wizard.
4
Add the note ID in the appropriate section. For example, if you want the note to appear when
the user clicks Next on the Origin/Destination screen, add the note ID to the corresponding
field as shown in Figure 12.26.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Desktop Shipping
207
Fig. 12.26
MESSAGES Section of the DS-TEMPLATES <NN> System Value
Loading Messages
After the user clicks Next, it can take a few moments for the subsequent step to appear on the
screen. You can configure messages to appear on the screen while the next page is loading. To
configure this message, set the showloading field in the PROPERTY section of the DSTEMPLATES <NN> system value to yes. This action causes a message to appear while the
Services and Confirmation steps are loading.
Table 12.9 
Page Loading Messages
Page Loading
Message
Services
Finding the best rates and services available... please wait...
Confirmation
Confirming shipments...this may take a while, please wait...
Approval Alerts
Approval alerts display messages to the user when the user clicks Next on the Origin/Destination
step. To enable approval alerts, set the Enable Approval Alert field in the Property section of the
DS-TEMPLATES <NN> system value to yes. You can configure the system to display an approval
alert depending on the ship to country code of the shipment. You can also set up a default approval
alert to appear regardless of the ship to country.
Table 12.10 
Approval Alert Setup
Category
Key
Value
ITRAX
PERMISSION_MESSAGE
Enter a message that you want to appear when
the user clicks Next on the Origin/Destination
step. This message appears regardless of the
Ship To address.
ITRAX
PERMISSION_MESSAGE_<SHIP_
TO_COUNTRY_CODE>
Enter a message that you want to appear when
the user clicks Next on the Origin/Destination
step. This message appears if the ISO country
code of the Ship To address matches
<SHIP_TO_COUNTRY_CODE>.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
208
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Chapter 13
TMS Menu Options
This section describes how to configure the Rate Shop, EOD Manifest, Recall Shipment, and
Drop-off Locator menu options in the Transportation Management menu.
Overview
210
Describes what you need to know before beginning configuration.
210
Describes how to configure the Rate Shop menu option.
Rate Shop
EOD Manifest
212
Describes how to configure the EOD Manifest menu option.
218
Describes how to configure the Cancel or Reprint Label menu option.
Cancel or Reprint Label
Recall Shipment
218
Describes how to configure the Recall Shipment menu option.
219
Describes how to configure the Drop-Off Locator menu option.
Drop-Off Locator
210
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Overview
This section describes how to configure the Rate Shop, EOD Manifest, Cancel or Reprint Label,
Recall Shipment, and Drop-Off Locator options in the Transportation Management menu. For a
description of these menu options, see the TMS Menu Options section of User Guide:
Transportation Management System. The configuration of the Desktop Shipping menu option is
covered in Chapter 12, “Desktop Shipping,” on page 181.
Rate Shop
The Rate Shop screen allows you to search for carrier rates using criteria including delivery dates,
address details, and package dimensions. The screen can be used to quickly obtain rate quotes
based on basic information, without the need to create a shipment in the system. This screen can
have up to four tabs, each with slightly different search criteria.
Fig. 13.1
Rate Shop
You can configure the number of tabs that appear on the screen. Carriers base their rates on a range
of criteria, and these criteria vary from one carrier to the next. When choosing tabs, consider the
carriers configured for this supplier. Consider also the shipper location; for example, some
countries do not have post codes. Table 13.1 displays the system values that you can use to
configure the Rate Shop screen.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Menu Options
Table 13.1 
System Values: Rate Shop Screen
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
RATESHOP SHIP FROM
MANDATORY
Possible values:
yes - the Ship From field is mandatory.
no - the Ship From field is optional.
Default value: yes.
ITRAX
RATE SHOP SHOW BASE Determines the charges that appear in the View
COSTS
Rates table.
Possible values:
Customer - displays the Buying Charge column.
The Buying Charge is the amount that the
shipper pays the carrier for shipping the item.
Company - displays the Charge column. The
Charge column contains the amount that the
shipper charges the buyer for shipping the item.
Both - displays both the Buying Charge and
Charge columns.
None - neither column displays.
Default value: Company
ITRAX
RATESHOP SHOW
CHARGE BREAKDOWN
To view a breakdown of each charge in the View
Rates table, set this system value to yes. An
appears beside the charge
information icon
amount. When the user clicks this icon, a
window pops up displaying the charge
breakdown information.
Possible values: yes, no
Default value: no
ITRAX
SHOW BREAKDOWN
DETERMINATION
This system value applies when the RATESHOP
SHOW CHARGE BREAKDOWN system
value is enabled for either the Rate Shop menu
option or the Rate Shop step of Desktop
Shipping. If SHOW BREAKDOWN
DETERMINATION is set to yes, then
information on how each charge breakdown is
calculated appears on the screen.
Possible values: yes, no
Default value: yes
ITRAX
RATESHOP-TABS
Determines which tabs to show in Rate Shop
and the order in which they appear.
Possible values:
ADDRESS - Rate Shop tab
POSTAL - Rate Shop (Postal Codes) tab
IATA - Rate Shop (Airport Codes) tab
POSTALSTATE - Rate Shop (Postal/State
Codes) tab
Default value: POSTAL,ADDRESS
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
211
212
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Description
ITRAX
SPS RATESHOP PDF
FILENAME
This system value specifies the filename for the
PDF file of rates that the user can save to their
computer. Enter the filename without the pdf
file extension.
ITRAX
SPS RATESHOP SHOW
PLACE OPTION
Determines whether the To Place field appears
next to the To Airport field in the Rate Shop
(Airport Codes) tab.
Default Value: RateShopReport
EOD Manifest
EOD Manifest allows the user to group or batch shipments so that they are ready for collection
from your Packing Location by the carrier. The EOD manifest screen groups all shipments with
the same Packing Location and carrier that have been rated but not included in a previous batch
into a new batch. This batch is then used to produce a carrier manifest document for the pickup
driver, and as a means of transmitting information to the carrier system. For more information on
EOD Manifest, see the TMS Workflow chapter in User Guide: Transportation Management
System.
Fig. 13.2
EOD Manifest
Table 13.2 contains information on system values that you can use to configure EOD Manifest.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Menu Options
213
Table 13.2 
EOD Manifest System Values
Category
Key
SPS
EOD - BATCH
The TrailerID and Trailer2 ID fields in Figure 13.2 are examples of
CONSTRAINT - <N> constraints applied to the creation of an EOD batch. These fields allow
the user to create an EOD batch using a subset of shipments that a
particular carrier is shipping from one packing location. In this example,
the constraints are the ID numbers of trailers on which shipments are
loaded. You can enter the number of the specific trailer that you want to
run EOD Manifest on. Create the constraint fields using the EOD BATCH CONSTRAINT - <N> system value, and map to fields in the
shipment header table XMSHDR0.
Description
Format:
LABEL=<FIELD LABEL>|FIELD=<SHIPMENT HEADER
TABLE.SHIPMENT HEADER TABLE FIELD>|<GLOBAL CARRIER
CODE>|<OPTIONAL/MANDATORY>
<FIELD LABEL> - the text that accompanies the field on the screen.
<SHIPMENT HEADER TABLE.SHIPMENT HEADER TABLE
FIELD> - the name of the shipment header table and the field in the table,
separated by a period.
<GLOBAL CARRRIER CODE> - adding a carrier code specifies that
this constraint only applies to batches created for that particular carrier.
<OPTIONAL/MANDATORY> - specifies whether the field in the UI is
optional or mandatory. The default value is optional.
Example: LABEL=Trailer ID|FIELD=XMSHDR0.SHXNO1|UPS
SPS
EOD - CLOSE
SHIPMENTS
Possible values:
yes - shipments close automatically during the EOD process after the
PLD file transmits successfully to the carrier. If all of the shipments on
the batch close successfully, then the batch is flagged with a Y in the
GRSTSF field to indicate that the batch is fully closed. If some of the
shipments fail to close, then the next time an option is run against the
batch, the process attempts to close out the remaining open shipments.
The batch itself is only flagged as closed when all of the shipments are
closed.
no - shipments do not close automatically during the EOD process after
the PLD file transmits successfully to the carrier.
Default value: no.
SPS
END OF DAY
This system value allows you to restrict the carriers that appear on the
CARRIERS EOD Manifest screen for a specific location. It consists of a comma<LOCATION CODE> separated list of global carrier codes that are applicable for the selected
packing location
Example: END OF DAY CARRIERS - ABC with a value of PURO,UPS
This example shows that for packing location ABC, the only available
carriers are Purolator (PURO) and UPS.
ITRAX
EOD PDF ACTION
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Specify the EOD action performed when the PDF button is selected. It
should be tied to the action drop-down menu. Possible values are
PRTSUMMARY, PRTDETAIL, PRTLABEL, PRTHAZMAT. The
default value is PRTSUMMARY.
214
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Description
SPS
EOD - CREATE
BUTTON OPTIONS
Use this system value to allow multiple batches to be created in one step.
Possible values: ALL, SELECTED, NONE
Default value: NONE
This system value is available in the Web UI only.
SPS
<CARRIER>: END
OF DAY UNIT <LOCN>
Use this system value to run the steps in the EOD process one at a time or
in a continuous sequence. Setting this system value to no allows the user
to step through the EOD options without having the system automatically
run through the remaining options. For example, it is possible to run
Create Batch without automatically running Generate PLD File.
Possible values: yes, no
Default value: yes
SPS
<CARRIER>: SHIP
REFERENCES
Use this system value to create references to send to carriers. Carriers use
these references for tracking purposes at the carrier side, or for reports
from the carrier side that are sent to the receiver. These references are
also printed on the carrier labels. You can configure these references per
transaction, or specify a default list of references for the system as a
whole.
Enter a comma-separated list of values. The number of codes that carriers
accept varies. If you specify more than the maximum allowed by the
carrier, then the references that exceed the limit set by the carrier are
ignored. For a list of possible values for this system value, see the SPS tab
of Appendix A on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation
Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
This system value does not apply to the carrier UPS. For UPS, this
configuration is made using the system value UPS: CUST REFERENCE.
SPS
UPS: CUST
REFERENCE
This system value has the same purpose as <CARRIER>: SHIP
REFERENCES. It applies to the UPS carrier. The system value
<CARRIER>: SHIP REFERENCES does not apply to UPS.
SPS
<CARRIER>: SHIP
REFERENCES <LOCN>
This system value is similar to <CARRIER>: SHIP REFERENCES, but
it allows you to create references for carriers that relate to a particular
packing location.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Menu Options
215
Category
Key
Description
SPS
EOD: <CARRIER>
Use this system value to configure buttons that appear on the EOD
OPTION <NUMBER> Manifest screen for a particular carrier. To create the carrier-specific key,
replace <CARRIER> with the carrier code and <NUMBER> with a
three-digit number that determines the order of the options configured for
the button.
Example:
System Value key: EOD: UPS OPTION 020
System Value contents: CREATEFILE,Generate PLD
File,xtnote_u,xtnote_d,02,UPSPLD,,,NON-CUST,01,
There are 11 possible fields:
• Field 1: A unique code to indicate the purpose of the new option.
• Field 2: A description that appears in the tooltip for this button.
• Field 3: An image file that displays when the button is enabled.
• Field 4: An image file that displays when the button is disabled.
• Field 5: The option type for this action, as listed in the corresponding
QuickPath option.
• Field 6: The option name for this action, as listed in the corresponding
QuickPath option.
• Field 7: If the requirement is to print a document for batch, specify the
document type.
• Field 8: If the requirement is to print a document for batch, specify the
document reference.
• Field 9: Set to NON-CUST to have the button appear in the set of
buttons on the top left of the SPSEOD screen, and to include the action
as part of the standard EOD set of options. Set to CUST to configure
the button to appear on the top right of the SPSEOD screen, rather than
running the action directly as part of the standard EOD set of options.
• Field 10: The Batch Status before the task is run, which is the status
that must be on the batch before it is possible to run this option.
• Field 11: The Batch Status after the task is successfully run.
This system value replaces the system value SPSEOD: <carrier>
OPTION <number>, which is obsolete.
Use this system value to configure EOD options when the options are
closely linked with the actual carrier options and perform an action in
sequence with other carrier options.
SPS
EOD SPLIT
CARRIER: [global
carrier]
This system value determines whether a particular carrier is split into
more than one carrier for the EOD process. This is necessary when a
carrier is divided into two particular business units, and when it requires
that its EOD process is run separately for each of these business units.
Example:
FedEx is divided into FedEx Express and FedEx Ground - these have two
separate carrier pickups. The configuration of the integration is the same
for both businesses of this carrier, but the EOD processes run separately.
Key: EOD SPLIT CARRIER: FEDEX
Value: FEDEX,FDXGND
This example displays the carriers FEDEX and FDXGND on the EOD
screen.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
216
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Category
Key
Description
SPS
EOD SPLIT
SERVICES: [business
carrier]
This system value applies whether the carrier is divided into more than
one business for EOD processing using the system value EOD SPLIT
CARRIER: [global carrier]. It determines what services are applicable to
the different splits of the carrier. The system value includes the list of
services applicable to this particular business of the carrier.
Example:
Key: EOD SPLIT SERVICES: FDXGND
Value: GND,HOME
In this example, the FDXGND business carrier is applicable for the
services GND and HOME only, for the global carrier FEDEX.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Menu Options
Category
Key
Description
SPS
EOD - NOT
APPLICABLE FOR
BATCH
System value format: [Field1=Value1,Value2]|[Field2=Value3]
217
The | symbol represents the logical OR. If Field1 is equal to either Value1
or Value 2, or Field2 is equal to Value3, then the shipment is not eligible
for batch processing.
Possible fields:
• SHPCOL
• SHSTSF
• SHSSTS
• SHGRUP
• SHOREF
• SHCREF
• SHFREF
• SHBREF
Reserved keyword values are:
**BLANK** - to indicate that the value condition is blank
Example:
SHSTSF=XX|SHSSTS=**BLANK**
The shipment is not eligible for EOD processing if the SHSTSF field
contains a value of XX, or if the SHSSTS field is blank.
SPS
UPLOAD FAILURE
FROM USER
You can configure the system to e-mail users when the EOD process does
not complete successfully for a particular carrier or packing location. The
user then manually intervenes in the EOD process when necessary. It is
recommended that email notifications are put in place for environments
that use black box messaging, as there is no user interface.
Value: Holds the username of the person on whose behalf the system
sends the e-mails.
Example: MYUSER
In this example, the email address of the From User is determined by
finding the MYUSER record in option US. Next, using the Employee
partner field on the User record, the system finds the NR record for this
Employee partner value. Then, in option NR, the Email field (NREML) is
referenced to find the email address applicable for the From User
For more information, see the system values UPLOAD FAILURE
MESSAGES and UPLOAD FAILURE METHOD in the SPS tab of
Appendix A on the QAD Document Library in QAD Transportation
Management|v2012 R00|Admin Guides|Appendices.
Alternatively, from S23 onwards, it is possible to avoid setting up records
through options US and NR, and to allow explicit entry of email
addresses instead. This is done by prefixing the system value with the
word EMAIL.
Example: EMAIL: [email protected]
In this example, the e-mail address of the From User is
[email protected].
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
218
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Note It is good practice to close shipments after they are included in an EOD manifest. This
practice allows shipment searches to run more quickly, as users can specify that closed shipments
be ignored. To close shipments after inclusion in an EOD manifest, use the system value EOD CLOSE SHIPMENT
Cancel or Reprint Label
The Cancel or Reprint screen allows the shipper to search for a shipment and void the shipment or
reprint the carrier label for the shipment. You can only void a shipment when it has not been
included in an EOD manifest. The Cancel or Reprint Label option consists of a search screen and a
search results screen, both of which are configurable.
Fig. 13.3
Cancel or Reprint Label Search Screen
Fig. 13.4
Cancel or Reprint Label Results Screen
Table 13.3 displays the system value used to configure the appearance of the Cancel or Reprint
Label screens.
Table 13.3 
System Values: Cancel or Reprint Label
Category
Key
Function
ITRAX
By default, if a user enters a numeric value without wildcards in either
INQUIRY
search field, a wildcard search is performed. To disable the default
WILDCARD
SEARCH DISABLED wildcard search and improve performance on the Inquiry and Cancel or
Reprint screens, set this system value to yes. However, if you explicitly
enter a wildcard in the search field, a wildcard search is performed
irrespective of this system value.
Recall Shipment
The Recall Shipment screen allows users to search for and edit a shipment.
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
TMS Menu Options
219
Fig. 13.5
Recall Shipment
It is not possible to configure the appearance of the Recall Shipment screen.
The Inquiry page discussed in User Guide: Base Web UI allows users to carry out the same tasks
as the Recall Shipment page, but with the advantage of additional search capabilities. There are a
number of system values that control the behavior of the Recall facility on the Inquiry page. For
more information, see the Inquiry chapter of Administration Guide: Base Web UI.
It is not possible to recall closed shipments, rated shipments, or shipments that are processed using
the Bear Tracks facility for first mile and last mile tracking.
Drop-Off Locator
A drop-off location is a building or post box where the shipper can deposit shipments for
collection and transportation by the carrier. The Drop-Off Locator option allows the shipper to
access the carrier’s drop-off locator web page using the Carrier drop-down list.
Fig. 13.6
Drop-Off Locator Screen
You can add values to the Carrier drop-down list in the Drop-Off Locator screen by creating a
system value for each carrier. Each value links to a URL for the particular carrier’s drop-off locator
page. Table 13.4 displays the format of the system value that you use to configure the Carrier field
on the Drop-off Locator screen.
Note This facility depends on carriers providing drop-off location information publicly over the
Internet. The solution performs a HTTP GET request with the captured parameters and redirects
the user to the carrier page with the results. The websites that carriers use to display drop-off
locator information are subject to change; any change requires a review of the system values used.
Table 13.4 
System Values: Drop-Off Locator Screen
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
220
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
System Value Category System Value Key
Function
ITRAX
Enter the URL to open when the user selects
<CARRIER_CODE> from the Carrier dropdown list and clicks Find the nearest drop-off
locations to the entered address for the specified
carrier.
<CARRIER_CODE>:
DROP LOCATOR
RESULT URL
Example: FEDEX: DROP LOCATOR RESULT
URL might have the value:
http://www.fedex.com/Dropoff/SearchAction.d
o?actionText=findlocation&locale=
en_US&appId=DotCom&errorCode=
&selectedAmbigousIndex=
0&searchType.fedExStaffed=
on&searchType.selfService=
on&searchType.fasc=
on&searchAddress.streetAddress=
<address>&searchAddress.city=
<city>&searchAddress.stateProvince=
<state>&searchAddress.postalCode=
<postalcode>
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Product Information Resources
QAD offers a number of online resources to help you get more information about using QAD
products.
QAD Forums (community.qad.com)
Ask questions and share information with other members of the user community, including
QAD experts.
QAD Knowledgebase (knowledgebase.qad.com)*
Search for answers, tips, or solutions related to any QAD product or topic.
QAD Document Library (www.qad.com/documentlibrary)
Get browser-based access to user guides, release notes, training guides, and so on; use
powerful search features to find the document you want, then read online, or download and
print PDF.
QAD Learning Center (learning.qad.com)*
Visit QAD’s one-stop destination for all courses and training materials.
*Log-in required
222
Administration Guide — Transportation Management System
Questions? Visit community.qad.com
Index
A
AL 18, 22
axis 47, 55, 69
C
CG 18, 21
CH 5, 18, 25, 70, 123
client 13
D
D2 175
E
EDI transfer 134
EOD 15, 134
files 2
Manifest 126, 166, 212
F
FRROUT 138
G
GC 18, 20
I
inquiry 182
Internal ID 4, 10, 12, 14
L
LMTFM2 106
loadspace 52, 55, 58
LTLFM2 89
LTLRT2 92, 106
M
menu
left menu 6
main 100
recently visited 4
ML 186
N
NR 11, 27, 77, 188
P
pack 59, 145
length 146
type 72, 80
types 55
volume 142
weight 81, 142, 146
Packing Location 8, 10, 121, 122, 131, 138, 139, 153,
154
Precision Content Group 4
R
RG 48, 56, 57, 67
RM 76, 102
RN 81, 97, 113
RT 24, 74, 77, 103
S
SCAC 77
SE 89, 97, 103, 112
shipper
location 10
T
TH 49, 57, 65, 70
title bar links 179
TRTFMT 94
TRTRTS 96
TZ 46
X
XTLTLSHP 74
XTRTESHP 93
Y
Y2 67
Y5 18, 21
Z
ZC 49, 66, 71, 73
ZX 47
224
Administration Guide — Base Web UI